Navigation

  • Page 1

    GE Fanuc AutomationComputer Numerical Control ProductsSeries 16i/160i/160is-MBSeries 18i/180i/180is-MB5Series 18i/180i/180is-MBOperator's ManualGFZ-63534EN/02June 2002

  • Page 2

    GFL-001Warnings, Cautions, and Notesas Used in this PublicationWarningWarning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment ormay be associated with its use.In situatio...

  • Page 3

    s–1SAFETY PRECAUTIONSThis section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautionsbe observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in thissection assume this configuration). Note th...

  • Page 4

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONSB–63534EN/02s–21 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTEThis manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to themachine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.Also, supplementary informa...

  • Page 5

    B–63534EN/02SAFETY PRECAUTIONSs–32 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSWARNING1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performinga trial run using, for example, the ...

  • Page 6

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONSB–63534EN/02s–4WARNING8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine–tool builder. Whenusing such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine–tool builder for details of theiruse and any related cautions.CAUTION1Do not remove the in...

  • Page 7

    B–63534EN/02SAFETY PRECAUTIONSs–53 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TOPROGRAMMINGThis section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting toperform programming, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefullysuch that you are fully famili...

  • Page 8

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONSB–63534EN/02s–6WARNING6. Stroke checkAfter switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Strokecheck is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when strokecheck is disabled, an alarm is not issued even ...

  • Page 9

    B–63534EN/02SAFETY PRECAUTIONSs–74 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLINGThis section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attemptingto operate your machine, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully,such that you are fu...

  • Page 10

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONSB–63534EN/02s–8WARNING7. Workpiece coordinate system shiftManual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinatesystem. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm thecoordinate system carefully.If the ma...

  • Page 11

    B–63534EN/02SAFETY PRECAUTIONSs–95 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCEWARNING1. Memory backup battery replacementOnly those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may performthis work.When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circ...

  • Page 12

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONSB–63534EN/02s–10WARNING2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacementOnly those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may performthis work.When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked andfitted with an...

  • Page 13

    B–63534EN/02SAFETY PRECAUTIONSs–11WARNING3. Fuse replacementBefore replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of theblown fuse.For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenancetraining may perform this work.When replac...

  • Page 14

  • Page 15

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–1SAFETY PRECAUTIONSs–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. GENERAL1. GENERAL3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 16

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–24.11EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION (G02.3, G03.3)71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (G05.1)75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13NURBS INTER...

  • Page 17

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–39. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A CODE144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED VALUE DIRECTLY (...

  • Page 18

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–413.3.3Continuous–Feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G78)236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3.4Intermittent–Feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G79)238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 19

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–515.CUSTOM MACRO392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1VARIABLES393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 20

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–619.8HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.9LOOK–AHEAD BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE INTERPOLATION TIME CONSTANT CHANGE FUNCTION508. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 21

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–71.2TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING–AUTOMATIC OPERATION704. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3AUTOMATIC OPERATION705. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4TESTING A PROGRAM707. . . . ...

  • Page 22

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–84. AUTOMATIC OPERATION789. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1MEMORY OPERATION790. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2MDI...

  • Page 23

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–98.3FILE DELETION874. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT875. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Page 24

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–109.4SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH953. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5DELETING PROGRAMS955. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 25

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–1111.4.2Tool Length Measurement1034. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.3Displaying and Entering Setting Data1036. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 26

    B–63534EN/02Table of Contentsc–12APPENDIXH. TAPE CODE LIST1153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT1156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE...

  • Page 27

    I. GENERAL

  • Page 28

  • Page 29

    GENERALB–63534EN/021. GENERAL31 GENERALThis manual consists of the following parts:I. GENERALDescribes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals,and notes for reading this manual.II. PROGRAMMINGDescribes each function: Format used to program functions in the NClanguage, characte...

  • Page 30

    GENERAL1. GENERALB–63534EN/024Model nameAbbreviationFANUC Series 180i–MB180i–MBSeries 180iFANUC Series 180is–MB180is–MBSeries 180isRemark) The 18i–MB5, 180i–MB5, 180is–MB5, 18i–MB, 180i–MB, and180is–MB may be collectively referred to as the 18i/180i/180is–MB.This manual us...

  • Page 31

    GENERALB–63534EN/021. GENERAL5Related manuals of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/ 210i/160is/180is/210is MODEL B (2/2)Manual nameSpecificationnumberCAP (T series)FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUALB–63284ENFANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUALB–63304ENMANUAL GUIDE For Lathe PROGRAMMING M...

  • Page 32

    GENERAL1. GENERALB–63534EN/026The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR a seriesManual nameSpecificationnumberFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a seriesDESCRIPTIONSB–65142FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a seriesPARAMETER MANUALB–65150FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a seriesDESCRIPTIONSB–65152FANUC AC S...

  • Page 33

    GENERALB–63534EN/021. GENERAL7When machining the part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare theprogram, then operate the CNC machine by using the program.1) First, prepare the program from a part drawing to operate the CNCmachine tool.How to prepare the program is described in the Chapter I...

  • Page 34

    GENERAL1. GENERALB–63534EN/028ToolSide cuttingFace cuttingHole machiningPrepare the program of the tool path and machining conditionaccording to the workpiece figure, for each machining.

  • Page 35

    GENERALB–63534EN/021. GENERAL9CAUTION1 The function of an CNC machine tool system depends notonly on the CNC, but on the combination of the machinetool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system, the CNC, theoperator ’s panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe thefunction, programming, and ...

  • Page 36

  • Page 37

    II. PROGRAMMING

  • Page 38

  • Page 39

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL131 GENERAL

  • Page 40

    PROGRAMMING1. GENERALB–63534EN/0214The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpieceparts figure (See II–4).The function of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs is called theinterpolation.ProgramG01 X_ _ Y_ _ ;X_ _ ;ToolWorkpieceFig. 1.1 (a) Tool movement along...

  • Page 41

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL15Symbols of the programmed commands G01, G02, ... are called thepreparatory function and specify the type of interpolation conducted inthe control unit.(a) Movement along straight lineG01 Y_ _;X– –Y– – – –;(b) Movement along arcG03X––Y––R–...

  • Page 42

    PROGRAMMING1. GENERALB–63534EN/0216Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is calledthe feed.ToolWorkpieceTableFmm/minFig. 1.2 (a) Feed functionFeedrates can be specified by using actual numerics. For example, to feedthe tool at a rate of 150 mm/min, specify the foll...

  • Page 43

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL17A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, toolchange and programming of absolute zero point as described later areperformed at this position. This position is called the reference position.Reference positionToolWorkpieceTableFig. 1.3.1 (a...

  • Page 44

    PROGRAMMING1. GENERALB–63534EN/0218ZYXPart drawingZYXCoordinate systemZYXToolWorkpieceMachine toolProgramCommandCNCFig. 1.3.2 (a) Coordinate systemThe following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations:(See II–7)(1) Coordinate system on part drawingThe coordinate system is...

  • Page 45

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL19The positional relation between these two coordinate systems isdetermined when a workpiece is set on the table.Y YTableWorkpieceXXCoordinate system spe-cified by the CNC estab-lished on the tableCoordinate system onpart drawing estab-lished on the work-pieceFi...

  • Page 46

    PROGRAMMING1. GENERALB–63534EN/0220(2) Mounting a workpiece directly against the jigJigProgram zero pointMeet the tool center to the reference position. And set the coordinate systemspecified by CNC at this position. (Jig shall be mounted on the predeterminedpoint from the reference position....

  • Page 47

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL21Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command orincremental command (See II–8.1).The tool moves to a point at “the distance from zero point of thecoordinate system” that is to the position of the coordinate values.B(10.0,30.0,20.0)YXTo...

  • Page 48

    PROGRAMMING1. GENERALB–63534EN/0222The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpieceis cut is called the cutting speed.As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speedin rpm unit.min–1f D mmm/minToolV: Cutting speedWorkpieceSpindle speed NTool diam...

  • Page 49

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL23When drilling, tapping, boring, milling or the like, is performed, it isnecessary to select a suitable tool. When a number is assigned to each tooland the number is specified in the program, the corresponding tool isselected.0102Tool numberATC magazine <Whe...

  • Page 50

    PROGRAMMING1. GENERALB–63534EN/0224When machining is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle,and feed coolant. For this purpose, on–off operations of spindle motor andcoolant valve should be controlled.WorkpieceToolCoolant The function of specifying the on–off operations of...

  • Page 51

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL25A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine iscalled the program. By specifying the commands, the tool is moved alonga straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and off.In the program, specify the commands in the sequence o...

  • Page 52

    PROGRAMMING1. GENERALB–63534EN/0226 The block and the program have the following configurations.N ffff G ff Xff.f Yfff.f M ff S ff T ff ;1 blockSequence numberPreparatory functionDimension wordMiscel-laneous functionSpindle functionTool func-tionEnd of blockFig. 1.7 (b)...

  • Page 53

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL27When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of aprogram, a program for the pattern is created. This is called thesubprogram. On the other hand, the original program is called the mainprogram. When a subprogram execution command appears duringe...

  • Page 54

    PROGRAMMING1. GENERALB–63534EN/0228Usually, several tools are used for machining one workpiece. The toolshave different tool length. It is very troublesome to change the programin accordance with the tools.Therefore, the length of each tool used should be measured in advance.By setting the dif...

  • Page 55

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/021. GENERAL29Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine toprevent tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools canmove is called the stroke.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇMotorLimit switchTableMachine zero pointSpecify these di...

  • Page 56

    PROGRAMMING2. CONTROLLED AXESB–63534EN/02302 CONTROLLED AXES

  • Page 57

    PROGRAMMING2. CONTROLLED AXESB–63534EN/0231Item16i–MB, 160i–MB,160is–MB16i–MB, 160i–MB, 160is–MB(two–path control)No. of basic controlledaxes3 axes3 axes for each path(6 axes in total)Controlled axes expansion (total)Max. 8 axes(included in Cs axis)Max. 8 axes for each path(includ...

  • Page 58

    PROGRAMMING2. CONTROLLED AXESB–63534EN/0232The names of three basic axes are always X, Y, and Z. The name of anadditional axis can be set to A, B, C, U, V, or W by using parameter 1020.Parameter No. 1020 is used to determine the name of each axis.When this parameter is set to 0 or a character ...

  • Page 59

    PROGRAMMING2. CONTROLLED AXESB–63534EN/0233The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input) andleast command increment (for output). The least input increment is theleast increment for programming the travel distance. The least commandincrement is the least increment for...

  • Page 60

    PROGRAMMING2. CONTROLLED AXESB–63534EN/0234Maximum stroke = Least command increment 99999999See 2.3 Incremen System.Table 2.4 (a) Maximum strokesIncrement systemMaximum strokeMetric machine system"99999.999 mm"99999.999 degIS–BInch machine system"9999.9999 inch"99999.999...

  • Page 61

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/023. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)353 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)A number following address G determines the meaning of the commandfor the concerned block.G codes are divided into the following two types.TypeMeaningOne–shot G codeThe G code is effective only in ...

  • Page 62

    PROGRAMMING3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02361. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set atpower–up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states described below.(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with asindicated in Table 3.(2...

  • Page 63

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/023. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)37G code list for M series (1/4)G codeGroupFunctionG00PositioningG01Linear interpolationG02Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CWG0301Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCWG02.2, G03.2Involute interpolationG02.3, G03....

  • Page 64

    PROGRAMMING3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)B–63534EN/0238G code list for M series (2/4)G codeGroupFunctionG27Reference position return checkG28Automatic return to reference positionG29Automatic return from reference positionG302nd, 3rd and 4th reference position returnG30.100Floating referen...

  • Page 65

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/023. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)39G code list for M series (3/4)G codeGroupFunctionG52Local coordinate system settingG5300Machine coordinate system selectionG54Workpiece coordinate system 1 selectionG54.114Additional workpiece coordinate system selectionG54.223Rotary ...

  • Page 66

    PROGRAMMING3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)B–63534EN/0240G code list for M series (4/4)G codeGroupFunctionG8009Canned cycle cancel/external operation function cancelG80.524Synchronization start of electronic gear box (EGB) (for two axes program-ming)G8109Drilling cycle, spot boring cycle or ...

  • Page 67

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS414 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

  • Page 68

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0242The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece systemspecified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverserate.In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point isprogrammed.In the incremental command ...

  • Page 69

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS43The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F.Even if linear interpolation positioning is specified, nonlinearinterpolation positioning is used in the following cases. Therefore, becareful to ensure that the tool does not foul t...

  • Page 70

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0244For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), finalpositioning from one direction is available.Start positionTemporary stopEnd positionOverrunStart position _ : For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end position, an...

  • Page 71

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS45D During canned cycle for drilling, no single direction positioning iseffected in Z axis.D No single direction positioning is effected in an axis for which nooverrun has been set by the parameter.D When the move distance 0 is commanded, the sin...

  • Page 72

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0246Tools can move along a lineF_:Speed of tool feed (Feedrate) _:For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end point , and for an incremental commnad, the distance the tool moves.G01 _F_;IPIPA tools move along a line to the specified posi...

  • Page 73

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS47202) 402300400.14907The feed rate for the C axis is0.14907 (min)8268.3 deg min8A calculation example is as follows.G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ;This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metricinput. The time required for dis...

  • Page 74

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0248The command below will move a tool along a circular arc.G17G03 Arc in the XpYp planeArc in the ZpXpplaneG18Arc in the YpZpplaneXp_Yp_G02G03G02G03G02G19Xp_ p_Yp_ Zp_I_ J_R_F_ ;I_ K_R_F_J_ K_R_F_Table. 4.4 Description of the Command FormatCommand...

  • Page 75

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS49“Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane(ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewedin the positive–to–negative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis or Xp axis,respectively) in the Cartesia...

  • Page 76

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0250The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arccan be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.In this case, one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 180° areconsidered. Wh...

  • Page 77

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS51 1006040090120 14020060R50RY axisX axisThe above tool path can be programmed as follows ;(1) In absolute programmingG92X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ;G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0R60.0 F300.;G02 X120.0 Y60.0R50.0 ;orG92X200.0 Y40.0Z0 ;G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0I-60.0 F30...

  • Page 78

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0252Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying upto two other axes which move synchronously with the circularinterpolation by circular commands.G03 Synchronously with arc of XpYp planeSynchronously with arc of ZpXp planeG1...

  • Page 79

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS53Helical interpolation B moves the tool in a helical manner. Thisinterpolation can be executed by specifying the circular interpolationcommand together with up to four additional axes in simplehigh–precision contour control mode (see II–19....

  • Page 80

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0254Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolationcommand together with a desired number of revolutions or a desiredincrement (decrement) for the radius per revolution.Conical interpolation is enabled by specifying the spi...

  • Page 81

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS55G03 XpYp planeZpXp planeG18YpZp planeG02G03G02G03G02G19X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ Q_ L_ F_ ;G17Z_ X_ Y_ K_ I_ J_ Q_ L_ F_ ;Y_ Z_ X_ J_ K_ I_ Q_ L_ F_ ;(*1)One of the height increment/decrement (I, J, K), radius increment/decrement (Q), and the number of...

  • Page 82

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0256Spiral interpolation in the XY plane is defined as follows:(X – X0)2 + (Y – Y0)2 = (R + Q’)2X0 : X coordinate of the centerY0 : Y coordinate of the centerR : Radius at the beginning of spiral interpolationQ’ : Variation in radiusWhen th...

  • Page 83

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS57In spiral or conical interpolation, R for specifying an arc radius cannot bespecified.Corner deceleration between the spiral/conical interpolation block andother blocks can be performed only in simple high–precision contourcontrol mode.The fu...

  • Page 84

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0258(1) With absolute values, the path is programmed as follows:G90 G02 X0 Y–30.0 I0 J–100.0 Q–20.0L4 F300;(2) With incremental values, the path is programmed as follows:G91 G02 X0 Y–130.0 I0 J–100.0 Q–20.0L4 F300;(Either the Q or L set...

  • Page 85

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS59Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour controlin converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate systemto the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movementof a rotary axis (rotation of a ...

  • Page 86

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0260In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, program commands arespecified with Cartesian coordinates on the polar coordinate interpolationplane. The axis address for the rotation axis is used as the axis addressfor the second axis (virtual axi...

  • Page 87

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS61The polar coordinate interpolation mode cannot be started or terminated(G12.1 or G13.1) in the tool offset mode (G41 or G42). G12.1 or G13.1must be specified in the tool offset canceled mode (G40).Tool length offset must be specified in the po...

  • Page 88

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0262Example of Polar Coordinate Interpolation Program Based on X Axis(Linear Axis) and C Axis (Rotary Axis)C’(hypothetical axis)C axisPath after cutter compensationProgram pathN204N205N206N203N202N201N208N207X axisZ axisN200ToolO0001 ; N010 T0101...

  • Page 89

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS63The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is onceinternally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surfaceso that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed withanother axis. After inter...

  • Page 90

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0264To perform tool offset in the cylindrical interpolation mode, cancel anyongoing cutter compensation mode before entering the cylindricalinterpolation mode. Then, start and terminate tool offset within thecylindrical interpolation mode.In the c...

  • Page 91

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS65Example of a Cylindrical Interpolation ProgramO0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ); N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ; N02 G01 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; N03 G07.1 C57299 ; (*)N04 G90 G01 G42 Z120.0 D01 F250 ; N05 C30.0 ; N06 G02 Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0 ; N07 G01 Z70.0 ; N0...

  • Page 92

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0266Involute curve machining can be performed by using involuteinterpolation. Involute interpolation ensures continuous pulse distributioneven in high–speed operation in small blocks, thus enabling smooth andhigh–speed machining. Furthermore,...

  • Page 93

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS67An involute curve on the X–Y plane is defined as follows ;X (θ)=R [cos θ+ (θ-θ0 ) sin θ] +X0Y (θ)=R [sin θ- (θ-θ0 ) cos θ] +Y0where,X0 , Y0 :Coordinates of the center of a base circleR:Base circle radiusθ0: Angle of the start point...

  • Page 94

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0268When only a start point and I, J, and K data are given, two types of involutecurves can be created. One type of involute curve extends towards thebase circle, and the other extends away from the base circle. When thespecified end point is clo...

  • Page 95

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS69The following G codes can be specified in involute interpolation mode:G04 : DwellG10 : Data settingG17 : X–Y plane selectionG18 : Z–X plane selectionG19 : Y–Z plane selectionG65 : Macro callG66 : Macro modal callG67 : Macr...

  • Page 96

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0270Both the start point and end point must be within 100 turns from the pointwhere the involute curve starts. An involute curve can be specified tomake one or more turns in a single block. If the specified start point or end point is beyond 100 ...

  • Page 97

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS71Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of aworkpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore,exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect toanother axis. This enables tapered groo...

  • Page 98

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0272Exponential relational expressions for a linear axis and rotary axis aredefined as follows:tan (I)X(θ)=R (e –1) kθtan (I)1A(q)=(–1)w 360 2πθK =⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅tan (J)ω=0/1⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅...

  • Page 99

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS73CAUTIONThe amount for dividing the linear axis for exponentialinterpolation (span value) affects figure precision. However,if an excessively small value is set, the machine may stopduring interpolation. Try to specify an optimal span valuedep...

  • Page 100

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0274kθtan (I)tan (B)Z (θ) = {–U tan (I) } (e–1) +Z (0)(3)2rX (θ) = {–U tan (I) } (e–1) (4)2rkθtan (I)1A (q) = (–1)w 360 2πθK=tan (I)tan (J)X (q), Z (q), A (q) : Absolute value on the X–axis, Z–axis, andA–axis from the originr:...

  • Page 101

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS75Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on theprogram command.D For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such asat corners, machining is performed exactly as specified by the programcommand.D For thos...

  • Page 102

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0276When a program approximates a sculptured curve with line segments, thelength of each segment differs between those portions that have mainlya small radius of curvature and those that have mainly a large radius ofcurvature. The length of the li...

  • Page 103

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS77Interpolated by smooth curveInterpolated by smooth curveN17N16N1N2N15N14N13N12N11N10N9N3N4N5N6N7N8Linear interpolationLinear interpolationN17N16N1N2N15N14N13N12N11N10N9N3N4N5N6N7N8Smooth interpolation is performed when all the following conditi...

  • Page 104

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0278Smooth interpolation can be specified only for the X–, Y–, and Z–axesand any axes parallel to these axes (up to three axes at one time).Commands for turning on and off smooth interpolation mode must beexecuted in high–precision contour ...

  • Page 105

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS79Many computer–aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal diesfor automobiles and airplanes utilize non–uniform rational B–spline(NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies.This function enables NURBS curve exp...

  • Page 106

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0280G05 P10000 ;(Start high–precision contour control mode)...G06.2 [P_] K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] [F_] ;K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ;K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ;K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ;...K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ;K_ ;...K_ ;G01 ......G05 P0 ;(End high–precision contour control mode)G06...

  • Page 107

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS81The number of specified knots must equal the number of control pointsplus the rank value. In the blocks specifying the first to last control points,each control point and a knot are specified in an identical block. Afterthese blocks, as many ...

  • Page 108

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0282No.Displayed messageDescriptionPS5115SPL: ErrorAn illegal rank is specified.No knot is specified.An illegal knot is specified.Too many axes are specified.Other program error.PS5116SPL: ErrorA look–ahead block contains a program error.The kn...

  • Page 109

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS83YZX1000.2000.

  • Page 110

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0284In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of thecircular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation isenabled. When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to a hypothetical axis,pulse distribu...

  • Page 111

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS85The hypothetical axis can be used only in automatic operation. In manualoperation, it is not used, and movement takes place.Specify hypothetical axis interpolation only in the incremental mode.Hypothetical axis interpolation does not support c...

  • Page 112

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0286Straight threads with a constant lead can be cut. The position codermounted on the spindle reads the spindle speed in real–time. The readspindle speed is converted to the feedrate per minute to feed the tool.G33 _ F_ ;PIF : Long axis dire...

  • Page 113

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS871 The spindle speed is limited as follows :1 x spindle speed x Spindle speed : min-1Thread lead : mm or inchMaximum feedrate : mm/min or inch/min ; maximum command–specified feedrate forfeed–per–minute mode or maximum feedrate that is det...

  • Page 114

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0288Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial movefollowing the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is inputduring the execution of this command, execution of the command isinterrupted and the next block is executed.T...

  • Page 115

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS89G31G91X100.0 F100;Y50.0;50.0100.0Skip signal is input hereActual motionMotion without skip signalYXFig. 4.16 (a) The next block is an incremental command G31G90X200.00 F100;Y100.0;Y100.0X200.0Skip signal is input hereActual motionMotion withou...

  • Page 116

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0290In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multistage skip functionstores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal (4–pointor 8–point ; 8–point when a high–speed skip signal is used) is turned on.Parameters No. 6202 ...

  • Page 117

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS91The skip function operates based on a high–speed skip signal (connecteddirectly to the NC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal.In this case, up to eight signals can be input. Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 – 2 ms...

  • Page 118

    PROGRAMMING4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0292The continuous high–speed skip function enables reading of absolutecoordinates by using the high–speed skip signal. Once a high–speed skipsignal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute coordinates are readinto custom macro variables #...

  • Page 119

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS935 FEED FUNCTIONS

  • Page 120

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0294The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feedfunctions are available:1. Rapid traverseWhen the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves ata rapid traverse feedrate set in the CNC (parameter No. 1420).2. Cutti...

  • Page 121

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS95If the direction of movement changes between specified blocks duringcutting feed, a rounded–corner path may result (Fig. 5.1 (b)).0Programmed pathActual tool pathYXFig. 5.1 (b) Example of Tool Path between Two Blocks In circular interpolation, a radi...

  • Page 122

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0296G00 IP_ ;G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse) IP_ ; Dimension word for the end pointIPIPThe positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse. Inrapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specified feedratebe...

  • Page 123

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS97Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03),etc. are commanded with numbers after the F code. In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change fromthe previous block is minimized.Four modes of specif...

  • Page 124

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0298After specifying G94 (in the feed per minute mode), the amount of feedof the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting a number afterF. G94 is a modal code. Once a G94 is specified, it is valid until G95 (feedper revolution) is specified....

  • Page 125

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS99When G93 is specified, the inverse time specification mode (G93 mode)is set. Specify the inverse time (FRN) with an F code.A value from 0.001 to 9999.999 can be specified as FRN, regardless ofwhether the input mode is inches or metric, or the increment...

  • Page 126

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02100G93 is a modal G code and belongs to group 05 (includes G95 (feed perrevolution) and G94 (feed per minute)).When an F value is specified in G93 mode and the feedrate exceeds themaximum cutting feedrate, the feedrate is clamped to the maximumcutting fee...

  • Page 127

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS101When a one–digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrateset for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. WhenF0 is specified, the rapid traverse rate is applied.The feedrate corresponding to the number currently selected...

  • Page 128

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02102Cutting feedrate can be controlled, as indicated in Table 5.4 (a).Table 5.4 (a) Cutting Feedrate ControlFunction nameG codeValidity of G codeDescriptionExact stopG09This function is valid for specifiedblocks only.The tool is decelerated at the end poi...

  • Page 129

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS103Exact stopG09 IP_ ;Exact stop modeG61 ;Cutting modeG64 ;Tapping modeG63 ;Automatic corner overrideG62 ;IPThe inter–block paths followed by the tool in the exact stop mode, cuttingmode, and tapping mode are different (Fig. 5.4.1 (a)).0Y(1)(2)Position ...

  • Page 130

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02104When cutter compensation is performed, the movement of the tool isautomatically decelerated at an inner corner and internal circular area.This reduces the load on the cutter and produces a smoothly machinedsurface.When G62 is specified, and the tool pa...

  • Page 131

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS105When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, the feedrate isoverridden before and after the inner corner. The distances Ls and Le,where the feedrate is overridden, are distances from points on the cuttercenter path to the corner (Fig. 5.4.2.1 (b)...

  • Page 132

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02106An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value isvalid even for dry run and F1–digit specification.In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows:F × (automatic override for inner corners) × (feedrate override)...

  • Page 133

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS107This function automatically controls the feedrate at a corner according tothe corner angle between the machining blocks or the feedrate differencebetween the blocks along each axis.This function is effective when ACD, bit 6 of parameter No. 1601, is se...

  • Page 134

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02108When the corner angle is smaller than the angle specified in theparameter, the relationship between the feedrate and time is as shownbelow. Although accumulated pulses equivalent to the hatched arearemain at time t, the next block is executed because ...

  • Page 135

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS109The machining angle is compared with the angle specified in parameter(No. 1740) for movements on the selected plane only. Machiningfeedrates are compared with that specified in parameter (No. 1741) formovement along the first and second axes on the se...

  • Page 136

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02110This function decelerates the feedrate when the difference between thefeedrates at the end point of block A and the start point of block B alongeach axis is larger than the value specified in parameter No. 1781. Thefunction executes block B when the f...

  • Page 137

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS111When acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is effective, therelationship between the feedrate and time is as described below. When the feedrate difference between blocks A and B along each axis islarger than the value specified in parameter No...

  • Page 138

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02112N1N2tFRmax1Vc [Y]VmaxVc [X]VmaxVmaxFeedrate alongthe X–axisWithout corner decelerationWith corner decelerationFeedrate alongthe Y–axisFeedrate alongthe tangentat the cornerThe allowable feedrate difference can be specified for each axis inparameter...

  • Page 139

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/025. FEED FUNCTIONS113Parameters related to automatic corner deceleration in look–aheadcontrol mode are shown below.Parameter descriptionNormalmodeLook–ahead control modeSwitching the methods for automatic cornerdecelerationNo.1602#4No.1602#4Allowable feedrate differenc...

  • Page 140

    PROGRAMMING5. FEED FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02114DwellG04 X_ ; or G04 P_ ; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted) P_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point not permitted)By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by thespecified time. In additi...

  • Page 141

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/026. REFERENCE POSITION1156 REFERENCE POSITIONA CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool isexchanged or the coordinate system is set, as described later. Thisposition is referred to as a reference position.

  • Page 142

    PROGRAMMING6. REFERENCE POSITIONB–63534EN/02116The reference position is a fixed position on a machine tool to which thetool can easily be moved by the reference position return function.For example, the reference position is used as a position at which toolsare automatically changed. Up to fo...

  • Page 143

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/026. REFERENCE POSITION117Tools are automatically moved to the reference position via anintermediate position along a specified axis. Or, tools are automaticallymoved from the reference position to a specified position via anintermediate position along a specified axis. W...

  • Page 144

    PROGRAMMING6. REFERENCE POSITIONB–63534EN/02118Positioning to the intermediate or reference positions are performed at therapid traverse rate of each axis.Therefore, for safety, the cutter compensation, and tool lengthcompensation should be cancelled before executing this command.The coordinate...

  • Page 145

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/026. REFERENCE POSITION119NOTE1 To this feedrate, a rapid traverse override (F0 ,25,50,100%)is applied, for which the setting is 100%.2 After a machine coordinate system has been establishedupon the completion of reference position return, theautomatic reference position re...

  • Page 146

    PROGRAMMING6. REFERENCE POSITIONB–63534EN/02120The lamp for indicating the completion of return does not go on when themachine lock is turned on, even when the tool has automatically returnedto the reference position. In this case, it is not checked whether the toolhas returned to the referenc...

  • Page 147

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/026. REFERENCE POSITION121Tools ca be returned to the floating reference position.A floating reference point is a position on a machine tool, and serves asa reference point for machine tool operation. A floating reference point need not always be fixed, but can be moved asr...

  • Page 148

    PROGRAMMING7. COORDINATE SYSTEMB–63534EN/021227 COORDINATE SYSTEMBy teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to theposition. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in acoordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes.When three program axes, t...

  • Page 149

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/027. COORDINATE SYSTEM123The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of themachine is referred to as the machine zero point. A machine tool buildersets a machine zero point for each machine.A coordinate system with a machine zero point set as its or...

  • Page 150

    PROGRAMMING7. COORDINATE SYSTEMB–63534EN/02124A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as aworkpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be setwith the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate system).A machining program sets a workpiece coordi...

  • Page 151

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/027. COORDINATE SYSTEM125The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as describedbelow. (For information about the methods of setting, see II– 7.2.1.)(1) Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected by G92 or automaticworkpiece coordinate system setting, ...

  • Page 152

    PROGRAMMING7. COORDINATE SYSTEMB–63534EN/02126The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 canbe changed by changing an external workpiece zero point offset valueor workpiece zero point offset value. Three methods are available to change an external workpiece zeropoint offset...

  • Page 153

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/027. COORDINATE SYSTEM127With the G10 command, each workpiece coordinate system can bechanged separately.By specifying G92IP_;, a workpiece coordinate system (selected with acode from G54 to G59) is shifted to set a new workpiece coordinatesystem so that the current tool po...

  • Page 154

    PROGRAMMING7. COORDINATE SYSTEMB–63534EN/02128XXYYA160100100100200If G92X100Y100; is commanded when the toolis positioned at (200, 160) in G54 mode, work-piece coordinate system 1 (X’ – Y’) shifted byvector A is created.60G54 workpiece coordinate systemTool positionNew workpiece coordinat...

  • Page 155

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/027. COORDINATE SYSTEM129The workpiece coordinate system preset function presets a workpiececoordinate system shifted by manual intervention to the pre–shiftworkpiece coordinate system. The latter system is displaced from themachine zero point by a workpiece zero point o...

  • Page 156

    PROGRAMMING7. COORDINATE SYSTEMB–63534EN/02130(a) Manual intervention performed when the manual absolute signal is off(b) Move command executed in the machine lock state(c) Movement by handle interrupt(d) Operation using the mirror image function (e) Setting the local coordinate system using G5...

  • Page 157

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/027. COORDINATE SYSTEM131Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems (standard workpiececoordinate systems) selectable with G54 to G59, 48 additional workpiececoordinate systems (additional workpiece coordinate systems) can beused. Alternatively, up to 300 additional work...

  • Page 158

    PROGRAMMING7. COORDINATE SYSTEMB–63534EN/02132(3) A custom macro allows a workpiece zero point offset value to behandled as a system variable.(4) Workpiece zero point offset data can be entered or output as externaldata.(5) The PMC window function enables workpiece zero point offset datato be r...

  • Page 159

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/027. COORDINATE SYSTEM133When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a childworkpiece coordinate system can be set for easier programming. Such achild coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system.G52 IP _; Setting the local coordinate syst...

  • Page 160

    PROGRAMMING7. COORDINATE SYSTEMB–63534EN/02134WARNING1 When an axis returns to the reference point by the manual reference point return function,thezero point of the local coordinate system of the axis matches that of the work coordinate system.The same is true when the following command is iss...

  • Page 161

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/027. COORDINATE SYSTEM135Select the planes for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, anddrilling by G–code. The following table lists G–codes and the planes selected by them.Table 7.4 Plane selected by G codeG codeSelectedplaneXpYpZpG17Xp Yp planeX–axis or a...

  • Page 162

    PROGRAMMING8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSIONB–63534EN/021368 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSIONThis chapter contains the following topics.8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91)8.2 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16)8.3 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21)8.4 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

  • Page 163

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/028. COORDINATE VALUEAND DIMENSION137There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolutecommand, and the incremental command. In the absolute command,coordinate value of the end position is programmed; in the incrementalcommand, move distance of the position its...

  • Page 164

    PROGRAMMING8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSIONB–63534EN/02138The end point coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates (radiusand angle). The plus direction of the angle is counterclockwise of the selected planefirst axis + direction, and the minus direction is clockwise.Both radius and an...

  • Page 165

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/028. COORDINATE VALUEAND DIMENSION139Specify the radius (the distance between the current position and thepoint) to be programmed with an incremental command. The currentposition is set as the origin of the polar coordinate system.RadiusCommand positionActual positionAngle...

  • Page 166

    PROGRAMMING8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSIONB–63534EN/02140N5 G15 G80 ;Canceling the polar coordinate commandIn the polar coordinate mode, specify a radius for circular interpolationor helical cutting (G02, G03) with R.Axes specified for the following commands are not considered part of thepola...

  • Page 167

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/028. COORDINATE VALUEAND DIMENSION141Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code.G20 ;G21 ;Inch inputmm inputThis G code must be specified in an independent block before setting thecoordinate system at the beginning of the program. After the G code forinch/metric...

  • Page 168

    PROGRAMMING8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSIONB–63534EN/02142Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal pointcan be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points canbe specified with the following addresses:X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, and F.The...

  • Page 169

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/029. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)1439 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value followingaddress S.This chapter contains the following topics.9.1 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A CODE9.2 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPE...

  • Page 170

    PROGRAMMING9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02144When a value is specified after address S, the code signal and strobe signalare sent to the machine to control the spindle rotation speed.A block can contain only one S code. Refer to the appropriate manualprovided by the machine ...

  • Page 171

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/029. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)145Specify the surface speed (relative speed between the tool and workpiece)following S. The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constantregardless of the position of the tool.G96 Sfffff ;↑ Surface speed (m/min or feet/...

  • Page 172

    PROGRAMMING9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02146G96 (constant surface speed control command) is a modal G code. Aftera G96 command is specified, the program enters the constant surfacespeed control mode (G96 mode) and specified S values are assumed as asurface speed. A G96 com...

  • Page 173

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/029. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)147G96 modeG97 modeSpecify the surface speed in m/min (or feet/min)G97 commandStore the surface speed in m/min (or feet/min)Command forthe spindlespeedSpecifiedThe specifiedspindle speed(rpm) is usedNot specifiedThe surface speed (m/m...

  • Page 174

    PROGRAMMING9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02148With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised when the spindlespeed deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditions.This function is useful, for example, for preventing the seizure of theguide bushing.G26 en...

  • Page 175

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/029. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)149The fluctuation of the spindle speed is detected as follows:1. When an alarm is issued after a specified spindle speed is reachedSpindle speedCheckCheckNo checkrrqqddSpecification of another speedStart of checkAlarmTimeSpecified sp...

  • Page 176

    PROGRAMMING9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02150NOTE1 When an alarm is issued in automatic operation, a singleblock stop occurs. The spindle overheat alarm is indicatedon the screen, and the alarm signal “SPAL” is output (set to1 for the presence of an alarm). This signal ...

  • Page 177

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0210. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)15110 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)Two tool functions are available. One is the tool selection function, andthe other is the tool life management function.General

  • Page 178

    PROGRAMMING10. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02152By specifying an up to 8–digit numerical value following address T, toolscan be selected on the machine.One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine toolbuilder’s manual for the number of digits commandable with addres...

  • Page 179

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0210. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)153Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (time orfrequency of use) for each group being specified. The function ofaccumulating the tool life of each group in use and selecting and usingthe next tool previously sequen...

  • Page 180

    PROGRAMMING10. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02154Tool life management data consists of tool group numbers, tool numbers,codes specifying tool compensation values, and tool life value.The Max. number of groups and the number of tools per group that canbe registered are set by parameter (G...

  • Page 181

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0210. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)155In a program, tool life management data can be registered in the CNC unit,and registered tool life management data can be changed or deleted.A different program format is used for each of the four types of operationsdescribed below.After a...

  • Page 182

    PROGRAMMING10. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02156G10L3 ;P_L_ ;T_H_D_ ;T_H_D_ ;P_L_ ;T_H_D_ ;T_H_D_ ;G11 ;M02 (M30) ;G10L3 :Register with deleting all groupsP_:Group numberL_:Life valueT_:Tool numberH_:Code specifying tool offset value (H code)D_:Code specifying tool offset value (D cod...

  • Page 183

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0210. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)157G10L3 orG10L3P1);P_L_Q_ ;T_H_D_ ;T_H_D_ ;P_L_Q_ ;T_H_D_ ;T_H_D_ ;G11 ;M02 (M30) ;Q_ : Life count type (1:Frequency, 2:Time)Meaning of commandFormatD Setting a tool life couttype for groupsCAUTION1 When the Q command is omitted, the valu...

  • Page 184

    PROGRAMMING10. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02158The following command is used for tool life management:Toooo; Specifies a tool group number.The tool life management function selects, from a specified group, atool whose life has not expired, and outputs its T code. In oooo,specify a num...

  • Page 185

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0210. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)159For tool life management, the four tool change types indicated below areavailable. The type used varies from one machine to another. For details,refer to the appropriate manual of each machinde tool builder.Table 10.2.3 Tool Change TypeTo...

  • Page 186

    PROGRAMMING10. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)B–63534EN/02160Suppose that the tool life management ignore number is 100.T101;A tool whose life has not expired is selected from group 1.(Suppose that tool number 010 is selected.)M06T102;Tool life counting is performed for the tool in group 1.(The life...

  • Page 187

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0210. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)161The life of a tool is specified by a usage frequency (count) or usage time(in minutes).The usage count is incremented by 1 for each tool used in a program.In other words, the usage count is incremented by 1 only when the firsttool group nu...

  • Page 188

    PROGRAMMING11. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63534EN/0216211 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONThere are two types of auxiliary functions ; miscellaneous function (Mcode) for specifying spindle start, spindle stop program end, and so on,and secondary auxiliary function (B code) for specifying index tablepositioning.When...

  • Page 189

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0211. AUXILIARY FUNCTION163When a numeral is specified following address M, code signal and astrobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals toturn on or off its functions.Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In some cases,however, u...

  • Page 190

    PROGRAMMING11. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02164In general, only one M code can be specified in a block. However, up tothree M codes can be specified at once in a block by setting bit 7 (M3B)of parameter No. 3404 to 1. Up to three M codes specified in a block aresimultaneously output to the m...

  • Page 191

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0211. AUXILIARY FUNCTION165The M code group check function checks if a combination of multiple Mcodes (up to three M codes) contained in a block is correct.This function has two purposes. One is to detect if any of the multiple Mcodes specified in a block include an M code...

  • Page 192

    PROGRAMMING11. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02166Indexing of the table is performed by address B and a following 8–digitnumber. The relationship between B codes and the correspondingindexing differs between machine tool builders.Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for detai...

  • Page 193

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION16712 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONThere are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally,the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when acommand calling a subprogram is encountered in the main program,control is passed to the...

  • Page 194

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/02168A program consists of the following components:Table 12 Program componentsComponentsDescriptionsTape startSymbol indicating the start of a program fileLeader sectionUsed for the title of a program file, etc.Program startSymbol indicating the s...

  • Page 195

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION169This section describes program components other than program sections.See II–12.2 for a program section.%TITLE;O0001 ;M30 ;%(COMMENT)Tape startProgram sectionLeader sectionProgram startComment sectionTape endFig. 12.1 (a) Program configurati...

  • Page 196

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/02170NOTEIf one file contains multiple programs, the EOB code forlabel skip operation must not appear before a second orsubsequent program number.Any information enclosed by the control–out and control–in codes isregarded as a comment.The user c...

  • Page 197

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION171A tape end is to be placed at the end of a file containing NC programs.If programs are entered using the automatic programming system, themark need not be entered. The mark is not displayed on the screen. However, when a file is output,the mark...

  • Page 198

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/02172This section describes elements of a program section. See II–12.1 forprogram components other than program sections.%(COMMENT)%TITLE;O0001 ;N1 … ;M30 ;Program sectionComment sectionProgram numberSequence numberProgram endFig. 12.2 (a) P...

  • Page 199

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION173A program consists of several commands. One command unit is called ablock. One block is separated from another with an EOB of end of blockcode.Table 12.2 (a) EOB codeNameISO codeEIA codeNotation in this manualEnd of block (EOB)LFCR;At the head...

  • Page 200

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/02174A block consists of one or more words. A word consists of an addressfollowed by a number some digits long. (The plus sign (+) or minus sign(–) may be prefixed to a number.)Word = Address + number (Example : X–1000)For an address, one of th...

  • Page 201

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION175Major addresses and the ranges of values specified for the addresses areshown below. Note that these figures represent limits on the CNC side,which are totally different from limits on the machine tool side. Forexample, the CNC allows a tool to...

  • Page 202

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/02176When a slash followed by a number (/n (n=1 to 9)) is specified at the headof a block, and optional block skip switch n on the machine operator panelis set to on, the information contained in the block for which /ncorresponding to switch number ...

  • Page 203

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION177The end of a program is indicated by programming one of the followingcodes at the end of the program:Table 12.2 (d) Code of a program endCodeMeaning usageM02For main programM30M99For subprogramIf one of the program end codes is executed in pro...

  • Page 204

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/02178If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, sucha sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in memory to simplifythe program.A subprogram can be called from the main program. A called subprogram can also call ...

  • Page 205

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION179NOTE1 The M98 and M99 code signal and strobe signal are notoutput to the machine tool.2 If the subprogram number specified by address P cannot befound, an alarm (No. 078) is output.l M98 P51002 ;l X1000.0 M98 P1200 ;l Execution sequence of subp...

  • Page 206

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/02180If P is used to specify a sequence number when a subprogram isterminated, control does not return to the block after the calling block, butreturns to the block with the sequence number specified by P. Note,however, that P is ignored if the mai...

  • Page 207

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION181A subprogram can be executed just like a main program by searching forthe start of the subprogram with the MDI.(See III–9.3 for information about search operation.)In this case, if a block containing M99 is executed, control returns to thesta...

  • Page 208

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/02182The 8–digit program number function enables specification of programnumbers with eight digits following address O (O00000001 toO99999999).Editing of subprograms O00008000 to O00008999, O00009000 toO00009999, O80000000 to O89999999, and O90000...

  • Page 209

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION1832) Macro call using M codeParameter used toProgram numberParameter used tospecify M codeWhen SPR = 0When SPR = 1No.6080No.6081No.6082No.6083No.6084No.6085No.6086No.6087No.6088No.6089O00009020O00009021O00009022O00009023O00009024O00009025O0000902...

  • Page 210

    PROGRAMMING12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONB–63534EN/021846) Pattern data functionProgram numaberWhen SPR = 0When SPR = 1O00009500O00009501O00009502O00009503O00009504O00009505O00009506O00009507O00009508O00009509O00009510O90009500O90009501O90009502O90009503O90009504O90009505O90009506O90009507O90009508...

  • Page 211

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING18513 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGThis chapter explains the following items:13.1CANNED CYCLE13.2RIGID TAPPING13.3CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)13.4GRINDING WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION BY CONTINUOUS DRESSING (FOR GRINDING...

  • Page 212

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02186Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs.With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can bespecified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles,normally more than one b...

  • Page 213

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING187A canned cycle consists of a sequence of six operations (Fig. 13.1 (a))Operation 1 Positioning of axes X and Y(including also another axis)Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R levelOperation 3 Hole machiningOperation 4 Operation...

  • Page 214

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02188Assume that the U, V and W axes be parallel to the X, Y, and Z axesrespectively. This condition is specified by parameter No. 1022.G17 G81 ………Z _ _ : The Z axis is used for drilling.G17 G81 ………W _ _ : The W axis ...

  • Page 215

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING189When the tool reaches the bottom of a hole, the tool may be returned topoint R or to the initial level. These operations are specified with G98 andG99. The following illustrates how the tool moves when G98 or G99 isspecified. Gen...

  • Page 216

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02190This cycle performs high–speed peck drilling. It performs intermittentcutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole.G73 (G98)G73 (G99)G73 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The dis...

  • Page 217

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING191The high–speed peck drilling cycle performs intermittent feeding alongthe Z–axis. When this cycle is used, chips can be removed from the holeeasily, and a smaller value can be set for retraction. This allows, drillingto be per...

  • Page 218

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02192This cycle performs left–handed tapping. In the left–handed tappingcycle, when the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle rotatesclockwise.G74 (G98)G74 (G99)G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_P_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ :...

  • Page 219

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING193Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must becanceled.In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling isnot performed.Specify P in blocks that perform drilling. If it is specified in a ...

  • Page 220

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02194The fine boring cycle bores a hole precisely. When the bottom of the holehas been reached, the spindle stops, and the tool is moved away from themachined surface of the workpiece and retracted.G76 (G98)G76 (G99)G76 X_ Y_ Z_ R_...

  • Page 221

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING195When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle is stopped atthe fixed rotation position, and the tool is moved in the direction oppositeto the tool tip and retracted. This ensures that the machined surface is notdamaged ...

  • Page 222

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02196This cycle is used for normal drilling. Cutting feed is performed to thebottom of the hole. The tool is then retracted from the bottom of the holein rapid traverse.G81 (G98)G81 (G99)G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole positio...

  • Page 223

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING197Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must becanceled.In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling isnot performed.Do not specify a G code of the 01 group (G00 to G03 or G60 (when theM...

  • Page 224

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02198This cycle is used for normal drilling. Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole. At the bottom, a dwellis performed, then the tool is retracted in rapid traverse. This cycle is used to drill holes more accurately...

  • Page 225

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING199Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must becanceled.In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling isnot performed.Specify P in blocks that perform drilling. If it is specified in a b...

  • Page 226

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02200This cycle performs peck drilling. It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole whileremoving shavings from the hole.G83 (G98)G83 (G99)G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from ...

  • Page 227

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING201Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must becanceled.In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling isnot performed.Specify Q in blocks that perform drilling. If they are specified in ...

  • Page 228

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02202An arbor with the overload torque detection function is used to retract thetool when the overload torque detection signal (skip signal) is detectedduring drilling. Drilling is resumed after the spindle speed and cuttingfeedrat...

  • Page 229

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING203*Positioning along the X–axis and Y–axis*Positioning at point R along the Z–axis*Drilling along the Z–axis (first drilling, depth of cut Q, incremental)Retraction (bottom of the hole → small clearance ∆, incremental)Ret...

  • Page 230

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02204In a single G83 cycle, drilling conditions are changed for each drillingoperation (advance → drilling → retraction). Bits 1 and 2 of parameterOLS, NOL No. 5160 can be specified to suppress the change in drillingconditions....

  • Page 231

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING205The forward or backward traveling speed can be specified with addressI in the same format as address F, as shown below:G83 I1000 ; (without decimal point)G83 I1000. ; (with decimal point)Both commands indicate a speed of 1000 mm/min...

  • Page 232

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02206N01M03 S___ ;N02Mjj ;N03G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ I_ K_ P_ ; N04X_ Y_ ;::N10G80 ;<Description of each block>N01: Specifies forward spindle rotation and spindle speed.N02: Specifies the M code to execute G83 as the small–hol...

  • Page 233

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING207Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle clockwise. When the bottomof the hole has been reached, the spindle is rotated in the reverse directionfor retraction. This operation creates threads.Feedrate overrides are ignored duri...

  • Page 234

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02208This cycle is used to bore a hole.G85 (G98)G85 (G99)G85 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the holeR_ : The distance from the initial level to point R levelF_ : Cutting ...

  • Page 235

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING209Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must becanceled.In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling isnot performed.Do not specify a G code of the 01 group (G00 to G03 or G60 (when theM...

  • Page 236

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02210This cycle is used to bore a hole.G86 (G98)G86 (G99)G86 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the holeR_ : The distance from the initial level to point R levelF_ : Cutting ...

  • Page 237

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING211Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must becanceled.In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling isnot performed.Do not specify a G code of the 01 group (G00 to G03 or G60 (when theM...

  • Page 238

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02212This cycle performs accurate boring.G87 (G98)G87 (G99)G87 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from the bottom of the hole to point ZR_ : The distance from the initial level to point R (the botto...

  • Page 239

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING213After positioning along the X– and Y–axes, the spindle is stopped at thefixed rotation position. The tool is moved in the direction opposite to thetool tip, positioning (rapid traverse) is performed to the bottom of the hole(po...

  • Page 240

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02214This cycle is used to bore a hole.G88 (G98)G88 (G99)G88 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the holeR_ : The distance from the initial level to point R levelP_ : Dwell...

  • Page 241

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING215Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must becanceled.In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling isnot performed.Specify P in blocks that perform drilling. If it is specified in a b...

  • Page 242

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02216This cycle is used to bore a hole.G89 (G98)G89 (G99)G89 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the holeR_ : The distance from the initial level to point R levelP_ : Dwell...

  • Page 243

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING217Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must becanceled.In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling isnot performed.Specify P in blocks that perform drilling. If it is specified in a b...

  • Page 244

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02218G80 cancels canned cycles.G80 ;All canned cycles are canceled to perform normal operation. Point R andpoint Z are cleared. This means that R = 0 and Z = 0 in incremental mode.Other drilling data is also canceled (cleared).M3 ...

  • Page 245

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING219400150250250150YXXZT 11T 15T 31#1#11#7#3#2#8#13#12#10#9#6#5#4# 11 to 16 Drilling of a 10mm diameter hole# 17 to 10 Drilling of a 20mm diameter hole# 11 to 13 Boring of a 95mm diameter hole(depth 50 mm)190200150250100100100100350200R...

  • Page 246

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02220Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.11, +190.0 is set in offset No.15, and +150.0 is set in offset No.31Program example;N001G92X0Y0Z0;Coordinate setting at reference positionN002G90 G00 Z250.0 T11 M6;Tool changeN003G43 ...

  • Page 247

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING221The tapping cycle (G84) and left–handed tapping cycle (G74) may beperformed in standard mode or rigid tapping mode. In standard mode, the spindle is rotated and stopped along with amovement along the tapping axis using miscellane...

  • Page 248

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02222When the spindle motor is controlled in rigid mode as if it were a servomotor, a tapping cycle can be sped up.G84(G98)G84(G99)G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hol...

  • Page 249

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING223In feed–per–minute mode, the thread lead is obtained from theexpression, feedrate × spindle speed. In feed–per–revolution mode, thethread lead equals the feedrate speed.If a tool length compensation (G43, G44, or G49) is s...

  • Page 250

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02224In the canned cycle mode, specify the subprogram call command M98P_in an independent block.Z–axis feedrate 1000 mm/minSpindle speed 1000 min-1Thread lead 1.0 mm <Programming of feed per minute>G94 ; Specify a feed–per...

  • Page 251

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING225When the spindle motor is controlled in rigid mode as if it were a servomotor, tapping cycles can be speed up.G74 (G98)G74 (G99)G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ;X_ Y_ : Hole position dataZ_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the ...

  • Page 252

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02226In feed–per–minute mode, the thread lead is obtained from theexpression, feedrate × spindle speed. In feed–per–revolution mode, thethread lead equals the feedrate.If a tool length offset (G43, G44, or G49) is specified in t...

  • Page 253

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING227Z–axis feedrate 1000 mm/minSpindle speed 1000 min-1Thread lead 1.0 mm <Programming for feed per minute>G94 ;Specify a feed–per–minute command.G00 X120.0 Y100.0 ;PositioningM29 S1000 ;Rigid mode specificationG84 Z–...

  • Page 254

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02228Tapping a deep hole in rigid tapping mode may be difficult due to chipssticking to the tool or increased cutting resistance. In such cases, the peckrigid tapping cycle is useful. In this cycle, cutting is performed several times un...

  • Page 255

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING229After positioning along the X– and Y–axes, rapid traverse is performedto point R. From point R, cutting is performed with depth Q (depth of cutfor each cutting feed), then the tool is retracted by distance d. The DOVbit (bit 4...

  • Page 256

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02230Specify P and Q in a block that performs drilling. If they are specified ina block that does not perform drilling, they are not stored as modal data.When Q0 is specified, the peck rigid tapping cycle is not performed.Do not specify ...

  • Page 257

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING231Canned grinding cycles make it easier for the programmer to createprograms that include grinding. With a canned grinding cycle, repetitiveoperation peculiar to grinding can be specified in a single block with a Gfunction; without c...

  • Page 258

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02232A plunge grinding cycle is performed.G75G75 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;I_ : Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.)J_ : Depth–of–cut 2 (A sign in the command specifies the directionof cutti...

  • Page 259

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING233X, (Z), I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode.I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal data common to G75, G77, G78,and G79. They remain valid until new data is specified. They are clearedwhen a group 00 G code ot...

  • Page 260

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02234A direct constant–dimension plunge grinding cycle is performed.G77G77 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;I_ : Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the directionof cutting.)J_ : Depth–of–cut 2 (A sign in the command spec...

  • Page 261

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING235When the cycle is performed using G77, a skip signal can be input toterminate the cycle. When a skip signal is input, the current operationsequence is interrupted or completed, then the cycle is terminated.The following shows how t...

  • Page 262

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02236A continuous–feed surface grinding cycle is performed.G78G78 I_ (J_) K_ X_ F_ P_ L_ ;II(J)XP(Dwell) (F) P(Dwell) (F)XZI_ : Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the directionof cutting.)J_ : Depth–of–cut 2 (A sign...

  • Page 263

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING237When J is omitted, it is assumed to be 1. J is valid only in the block whereit is specified.X, I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode.I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal data common to G75, G77, G78,and G79. T...

  • Page 264

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02238An intermittent–feed surface grinding cycle is performed.G79G79 I_ J_ K_ X_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;IJX(R) P (F) PXZ (F) (R)I_ : Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the directionof cutting.)J_ : Depth–of–cut 2 (A sign in t...

  • Page 265

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING239X, I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode.I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal data common to G75, G77, G78,and G79. They remain valid until new data is specified. They are clearedwhen a group 00 G code other t...

  • Page 266

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02240This function enables continuous dressing. When G75, G77, G78, or G79 is specified, grinding wheel cutting anddresser cutting are compensated continuously according to the amount ofcontinuous dressing during grinding.Specify an offs...

  • Page 267

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING241Compensation amounts set in offset memory can be modified by using theexternal tool compensation function or programming (by changingoffsets using custom macro variables).With these functions, the compensation amount for the diamete...

  • Page 268

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02242Every time an external signal is input, cutting is performed by a fixedamount according to the programmed profile in the specified Y–Z plane.G161 R_ ;G160 ;profile programSpecify the start of an operation mode and profile program....

  • Page 269

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING243Chamfering and corner rounding blocks can be inserted automaticallybetween the following:⋅Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks⋅Between linear interpolation and circular interpolation blocks ⋅Between cir...

  • Page 270

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02244N001 G92 G90 X0 Y0 ;N002 G00 X10.0 Y10.0 ;N003 G01 X50.0 F10.0 ,C5.0 ;N004 Y25.0 ,R8.0 ;N005 G03 X80.0 Y50.0 R30.0 ,R8.0 ;N006 G01 X50.0 ,R8.0 ;N007 Y70.0 ,C5.0 ;N008 X10.0 ,C5.0 ;N009 Y10.0 ;N010 G00 X0 Y0 ;N011 M0 ;010.020.030.040....

  • Page 271

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING245Chamfering and corner rounding can be performed only in the planespecified by plane selection (G17, G18, or G19). These functions cannotbe performed for parallel axes.A block specifying chamfering or corner rounding must be followe...

  • Page 272

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02246Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an externaloperation function signal can be output to allow the machine to performspecific operation.Concerning this operation, refer to the manual supplied by the machinet...

  • Page 273

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING247Machining can be repeated after moving or rotating the figure using asubprogram.D Rotational copyXp–Yp plane (specified by G17) : G72.1 P_ L_ Xp_ Yp_ R_ ;Zp–Xp plane (specified by G18) : G72.1 P_ L_ Zp_ Xp_ R_ ;Yp–Zp plane (sp...

  • Page 274

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02248(Example of a correct program)O1000 G00 G90 X100.0 Y200.0 ;⋅⋅⋅⋅ ;⋅⋅⋅⋅ ;M99 ;The linear copy command can be specified in a subprogram for arotational copy. Also, the rotational copy command can be specified ina subpro...

  • Page 275

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING249Y90P0P1P2P3P4P5P6P7XEnd point of the first copyStart point of the second copyStart pointDDDDDDDDDO1000 ;N10 G92 X–20.0 Y0 ;N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 ;N30 G01 G17 G41 X20. Y0 D01 F10 ;(P0)N40 Y20. ;(P1)N50 X30. ;(P2)N60 G72.2 P2000 L3 I90....

  • Page 276

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02250The figure cannot be copied during chamfering, corner rounding, or tooloffset.The two axes of the plane for copying a figure must have an identical unitsystem.Single–block stops are not performed in a block with G721.1 or G72.2.In ...

  • Page 277

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING251D Rotational copy (spot boring)O3000 ;N10 G92 G17 X80.0 Y50.0 ;(P0)N20 G72.1 P4000 L6 X0 Y0 R60.0 ;N30 G80 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 ;(P0)N40 M30 ;O4000 N100 G90 G81 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ ;(P1)N200 M99 ;YP1P060°XStart pointMain programSubprogram

  • Page 278

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02252D Linear copyO1000 ;N10 G92 X–20.0 Y0 ;N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 ;N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ;(P0)N40 Y_ ;(P1)N50 X_ ;(P2)N60 G72.2 P2000 L3 I70.0 J0 ;N70 X_ Y_ ;(P8)N80 X0 ;N90 G00 G40 X–20.0 Y0 ;N100 M30 ;O2000 G90 G01 X_ ;(P3)N100 ...

  • Page 279

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING253D Combination of rotationalcopying and linearcopying (bolt hole circle)O1000 ;N10 G92 G17 X100.0 Y80.0 ;(P0)N20 G72.1 P2000 X0 Y0 L8 R45.0 ;N30 G80 G00 X100.0 Y80.0 ;(P0)N40 M30 ;O2000 N100 G72.2 P3000 I0 J_ L3 ;N200 M99 ;YX45°P1P0...

  • Page 280

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02254Coordinate conversion about an axis can be carried out if the center ofrotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement arespecified. This function is very useful in three–dimensional machiningby a die–sinki...

  • Page 281

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING255subsequent N3 block, coordinates in the X’’Y’’Z’’ coordinate system arespecified with Xp, Yp, and Zp. The X’’Y’’Z’’ coordinate system is calledthe program coordinate system.If (Xp, Yp, Zp) is not specified i...

  • Page 282

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02256The following equation shows the general relationship between (x, y, z)in the program coordinate system and (X, Y, Z) in the original coordinatesystem (workpiece coordinate system).XYZ=M1xyz+x1y1z1XYZ=M1xyz+x2y2z2M2+x1y1z1M1X, Y, Z :...

  • Page 283

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING257Three–dimensional coordinate conversion can be applied to a desiredcombination of three axes selected out of the basic three axes (X, Y, Z) andtheir parallel axes. The three–dimensional coordinate system subjectedto three–dim...

  • Page 284

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02258G53Selecting the machine coordinate systemG65Custom macro callingG66Continuous–state custom macro callingG67Canceling continuous–state custom macro callingG73Canned cycle (peck drilling cycle)G74Canned cycle (reverse tapping cycl...

  • Page 285

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING259Three–dimensional coordinate conversion does not affect the degree ofmanual intervention or manual handle interrupt.Three–dimensional coordinate conversion does not affect positioning inthe machine coordinate system (e.g. specif...

  • Page 286

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/02260N1 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ;Carries out positioning to zero point H.N2 G68 X10. Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R30. ; Forms new coordinate system X’Y’Z’.N3 G68 X0 Y–10. Z0 I0 J0 K1 R–90. ; Forms other coordinate system X’’Y’’Z’’. The ori...

  • Page 287

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING261By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (onerotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can beindexed.Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped orclamped .S...

  • Page 288

    PROGRAMMING13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFYPROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/022622. Using no miscellaneous functionsBy setting to bits 2, 3, and 4 of parameter ABS, INC,G90 No.5500,operation can be selected from the following two options.Select the operation by referring to the manual written by the machinetool b...

  • Page 289

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING263Table 13.11 (a) Index indexing function and other functionsItemExplanationRelative position displayThis value is rounded down when bit 1 of parameter REL No. 5500specifies this option.Absolute position displayThis value is rounded ...

  • Page 290

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/0226414 COMPENSATION FUNCTIONThis chapter describes the following compensation functions:14.1 TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (G43, G44, G49)14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37)14.3 TOOL OFFSET (G45–G48)14.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION B (G39–G42)14.5 CUTTER...

  • Page 291

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION265This function can be used by setting the difference between the tool lengthassumed during programming and the actual tool length of the tool usedinto the offset memory. It is possible to compensate the difference withoutchanging the program.Sp...

  • Page 292

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02266Select tool length offset A, B, or C, by setting bits 0 and 1 of parameterTLC,TLB No. 5001.When G43 is specified, the tool length offset value (stored in offsetmemory) specified with the H code is added to the coordinates of the endposition spe...

  • Page 293

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION267(2) Cutter compensation CWhen the offset numbers for cutter compensation C are specified ormodified, the offset number validation order varies, depending on thecondition, as described below.O××××; H01 ; :G43P_ ;(1) :G44P_H02 ;(2) ...

  • Page 294

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02268NOTEThe tool length offset value corresponding to offset No. 0,that is, H0 always means 0. It is impossible to set any othertool length offset value to H0.Tool length offset B can be executed along two or more axes when the axesare specified i...

  • Page 295

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION269Actual positionProgrammed positionoffsetvalueε=4mmt1203030120t3t2+Y+X3050+Z3353018228Tool length offset (in boring holes No.1, 2, and 3)(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7) (8)(9)(13)(10)(11)(12)⋅ProgramH1=–4.0(Tool length offset value)N1 G91 G00 X120.0 ...

  • Page 296

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02270This section describes the tool length offset cancellation and restorationperformed when G53, G28, G30, or G31 is specified in tool length offsetmode. Also described is the timing of tool length offset. (1) Tool length offset vector cancellati...

  • Page 297

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION271NOTEWhen tool length offset is applied to multiple axes, allspecified axes involved in reference position return aresubject to cancellation.When tool length offset cancellation is specified at the same time, toollength offset vector cancellatio...

  • Page 298

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02272In tool length offset modeTypeEVO (bit 6 of pa-rameter No. 5001)Restoration block1Block containing a G43/G44blockA/B0Block containing an H commandand G43/44 commandCIgnoredBlock containing aG43P_H_/G44P_H_ commandWARNINGWhen tool length offset ...

  • Page 299

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION273By issuing G37 the tool starts moving to the measurement position andkeeps on moving till the approach end signal from the measurementdevice is output. Movement of the tool is stopped when the tool tipreaches the measurement position.Differenc...

  • Page 300

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02274The difference between the coordinates of the position at which the toolreaches for measurement and the coordinates specified by G37 is addedto the current tool length offset value.Offset value = (Current compensation value) + [(Coordinates of ...

  • Page 301

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION275WARNINGWhen a manual movement is inserted into a movement ata measurement federate, return the tool to the!positionbefore the inserted manual movement for restart.NOTE1 When an H code is specified in the same block as G37, analarm is generated....

  • Page 302

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02276G92 Z760.0 X1100.0 ; Sets a workpiece coordinate system withrespect to the programmed absolute zero point.G00 G90 X850.0 ;Moves the tool to X850.0.That is the tool is moved to a position that is aspecified distance from the measurementposition ...

  • Page 303

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION277The programmed travel distance of the tool can be increased or decreasedby a specified tool offset value or by twice the offset value.The tool offset function can also be applied to an additionalaxis.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇProgrammed pathTool center...

  • Page 304

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02278As shown in Table 14.3(a), the travel distance of the tool is increased ordecreased by the specified tool offset value.In the absolute mode, the travel distance is increased or decreased as thetool is moved from the end position of the previous...

  • Page 305

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION279WARNING1 When G45 to G48 is specified to n axes (n=1–6) simultaneously in a motion block, offset isapplied to all n axes.When the cutter is offset only for cutter radius or diameter in taper cutting, overcutting orundercutting occurs. Theref...

  • Page 306

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02280NOTE1 When the specified direction is reversed by decrease as shown in the figure below, the toolmoves in the opposite direction.2 Tool offset can be applied to circular interpolation (G02, G03) with the G45 to G48 commandsonly for 1/4 and 3/4 ...

  • Page 307

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION281ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇTool diameter:20φOffset No.:01Tool offset value:+10.0805040504030RN1N2N3N4N5N6N7N8N9N10N11N12N13N14303040X axisY axisProgram using tool offsetOrigin30RProgramN1 G91 G46 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 D01 ;N2 G47 G01 X50.0 F120.0 ;N3 Y40.0 ;...

  • Page 308

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02282When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of thetool (Fig. 14.4).To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offsetvector with a length equal to the radius of the tool (start–up). The offset...

  • Page 309

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION283G39(or ) ;D Start up(Cutter compensationstart)G00 (or G01) G41 (or G42)H_ ;G41G42R_I _H_: Command for axis movement: Cutter compensation left (Group 07): Cutter compensation right (Group 07): Incremental value from the end position. ...

  • Page 310

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02284Cutter compensation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18and G19 (G codes for plane selection.). This plane is called the offsetplane. If the offset plane is not specified, G17 is assumed to beprogrammed.Compensation is not execu...

  • Page 311

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION285G41 offsets the tool towards the left of the workpiece as you see when youface in the same direction as the movement of the cutting tool.G41 X_ Y_ I_ J_ H_ ;specifies a new vector to be created at right angles with the direction of(I, J) on the...

  • Page 312

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02286G41… ; :G02 (or G03) X_ Y_ R_ ;Above command specifies a new vector to be created to the left lookingtoward the direction in which an arc advances on a line connecting the arccenter and the arc end point, and the tool center to move along...

  • Page 313

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION287G42, contrary to G41, specifies a tool to be offset to the right of work piecelooking toward the direction in which the tool advances.G42 has the same function as G41, except that the directions of the vectorscreated by the commands are the opp...

  • Page 314

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02288G42… ; :G02 (or G03) X_ Y_ R_;ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇRR(X, Y)ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ(X, Y)Tool center pathNew vectorOld ve...

  • Page 315

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION289When the following command is specified in the G01, G02, or G03 mode,corner offset circular interpolation can be executed with respect to theradius of the tool. In offset modeor;X_Y_X_Z_Y_Z_G39;I_J_I_K_J_K_G39A new vector is created to the left...

  • Page 316

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02290When the following command is specified in the G00 or G01 mode, thetool moves from the head of the old vector at the start position to the endposition (X, Y). In the G01 mode, the tool moves linearly. In the G00mode, rapid traverse is carried...

  • Page 317

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION291The offset direction is switched from left to right, or from right to leftgenerally through the offset cancel mode, but can be switched not throughit only in positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01). In this case, thetool path is as show...

  • Page 318

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02292The offset amount is changed generally when the tool is changed in theoffset cancel mode, but can be changed in the offset mode only inpositioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01).Program as described below:G00 (or G01) X_ Y_ H_ ; (H_ indica...

  • Page 319

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION293If the tool compensation value is made negative (–), it is equal that G41and G42 are replaced with each other in the process sheet. Consequently,if the tool center is passing around the outside of the workbench it willpass around the inside ...

  • Page 320

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02294ÇÇÇÇÇÇN1N2N3N4N5N6N7N8N9N10N11R2=20.0R1=40.0Y axisX axis20.020.040.040.020.020.0Unit : mmN1 G91 G17 G00 G41 J1 X20.0 Y20.0 H08 ; N2 G01 Z–25.0 F100 ;N3 Y40.0 F250 ;N4 G39 I40.0 J20.0 ;N5 X40.0 Y20.0 ;N6 G39 I40.0 ;N7 G02 X40.0 Y–40.0 ...

  • Page 321

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION295When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of thetool (Fig. 14.5 (a)). To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, CNC first creates anoffset vector with a length equal to the radius of the tool (start–up). ...

  • Page 322

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02296D Start up(Tool compensationstart)G00(or G01)G41(or G42)P_ D_ ;G41G42P_D_: Cutter compensation left (Group07): Cutter compensation right (Group07): Command for axis movement: Code for specifying as the cutter compensation value(1–3digits) (D...

  • Page 323

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION297In the offset mode, when a block which satisfies any one of the followingconditions is executed, the CNC enters the offset cancel mode, and theaction of this block is called the offset cancel. 1. G40 has been commanded. 2. 0 has been command...

  • Page 324

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02298If the offset amount is negative (–), distribution is made for a figure inwhich G41’s and G42’s are all replaced with each other on the program.Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside of theworkpiece, it will pass a...

  • Page 325

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION299Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 andG19, (G codes for plane selection). This plane is called the offset plane.Compensation is not executed for the coordinate of a position which is notin the specified plane...

  • Page 326

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02300ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇY axisX axisUnit : mmN1Start position650RC2 (1550,1550)650RC3 (–150,1150)250RC1(700,1300)P4(500,1150) P5(900,1150)P6(950,900)P9(700,650)P8(1150,550)P7(1150,900)P1(250,550)P3(450,900)P2(250,900)N2N3N4N5N6N7N8N9N10N11G92 X0 Y...

  • Page 327

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION301This section provides a detailed explanation of the movement of the toolfor cutter compensation C outlined in Section 14.5.This section consists of the following subsections:14.6.1 General14.6.2 Tool Movement in Start–up14.6.3 Tool Movement i...

  • Page 328

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02302When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode, the tool movesas illustrated below (start–up):αLSG42rLαSrLCG42Tool center pathStart positionProgrammed pathWork-pieceLinear→CircularStart positionWorkpieceTool center pathLinear→Lin...

  • Page 329

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION303Tool path in start–up has two types A and B, and they are selected byparameter SUP (No. 5003#0).Linear→LinearαProgrammed pathTool center pathLSG42rLLinear→CircularrType AType BαLSG42LWorkpieceStart positionrLLinear→LinearLinear...

  • Page 330

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02304Tool path in start–up has two types A and B, and they are selected byparameter SUP (No.5003#0).αLSG42rLS CType AType BrG42LG42LLLLSrrG42LLLSrrCLLLinear→LinearLinear→CircularLinear→LinearLinear→CircularWorkpieceWork-pieceWorkpiece...

  • Page 331

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION305If the command is specified at start–up, the offset vector is not created.SN9N6N7N8SSG91 G40 … ; :N6 X100.0 Y100.0 ;N7 G41 X0 ;N8 Y–100.0 ;N9 Y–100.0 X100.0 ;Programmed pathTool center pathrNOTEFor the definition of blocks that d...

  • Page 332

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02306In the offset mode, the tool moves as illustrated below:αLLαCSLSCLSCSCLinear→CircularLinear→LinearProgrammed pathIntersectionTool center pathWorkpieceWork-pieceTool center pathIntersectionProgrammed pathWorkpieceProgrammed pathTool center...

  • Page 333

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION307rrSrIntersectionProgrammed pathTool center pathIntersectionAlso in case of arc to straight line, straight line to arc and arc to arc, thereader should infer in the same procedure.D Tool movement aroundthe inside(α<1°) with anabnormally lon...

  • Page 334

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02308αLrCSLSCLSLLrLLLSrr Linear→LinearLinear→CircularProgrammed pathTool center pathIntersectionWorkpieceCircular→LinearCircular→CircularIntersectionTool center path Programmed pathWork-pieceIntersectionTool center pathProgrammed pathWorkpi...

  • Page 335

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION309αLLLLSrrLLrrCLLLLLLrrLSLSrrLCCLLinear→LinearProgrammed pathTool center pathWorkpieceLinear→CircularCircular→LinearCircular→CircularProgrammed pathWork-pieceTool center pathWorkpieceProgrammed pathTool center pathWork-pieceTool center p...

  • Page 336

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02310If the end of a line leading to an arc is programmed as the end of the arcby mistake as illustrated below, the system assumes that cuttercompensation has been executed with respect to an imaginary circle thathas the same center as the arc and p...

  • Page 337

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION311If the center of the arc is identical with the start position or end point, P/Salarm (No. 038) is displayed, and the tool will stop at the end position ofthe preceding block.N5N6N7rAlarm(No.038)is displayed and the toolstops(G41)N5 G01 X100.0 ;...

  • Page 338

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02312LLLSrrG42G41G41G42rrSCrrLCSSG41G41G42G42CCrrLinear→LinearLinear→CircularProgrammed pathTool center pathWorkpieceProgrammed pathTool center pathWorkpieceWorkpieceWorkpieceWorkpieceProgrammed pathTool center pathCircular→LinearCircular→Ci...

  • Page 339

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION313When changing the offset direction in block A to block B using G41 andG42, if intersection with the offset path is not required, the vector normalto block B is created at the start point of block B.G41(G42)(G42)LLLABrrSG42G41LSLS(G41)G42ABLSrLL...

  • Page 340

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02314Normally there is almost no possibility of generating this situation.However, when G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 wascommanded with address I, J, and K this situation can occur.In this case of the figure, the cutter compensation is not ...

  • Page 341

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION315If the following command is specified in the offset mode, the offset modeis temporarily canceled then automatically restored. The offset mode canbe canceled and started as described in II–15.6.2 and 15.6.4.If G28 is specified in the offset ...

  • Page 342

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02316The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving directionin the previous block, irrespective of machining inner or outer side, bycommanding the cutter compensation G code (G41, G42) in the offsetmode, independently. If this co...

  • Page 343

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION317The following blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks, the toolwill not move even if cutter compensation is effected.M05 ;M code output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . S21 ;S code output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . G04 X10.0 ;Dwell. . . . . . ...

  • Page 344

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02318When two or more vectors are produced at the end of a block, the toolmoves linearly from one vector to another. This movement is called thecorner movement. If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movementisn’t performed ...

  • Page 345

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION319N4 G41 G91 G01 X150.0 Y200.0 ;N5 X150.0 Y200.0 ;N6 G02 J–600.0 ; N7 G01 X150.0 Y–200.0 ; N8 G40 X150.0 Y–200.0 ;P1P2 P3 P4P5P6N5N6N4N7N8Programmed pathTool center pathIf the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as follows:P1 → P2 →...

  • Page 346

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02320αSrLCαLSG40rLWorkpieceG40LProgrammed pathProgrammed pathTool center pathTool center pathWork-pieceLinear→LinearCircular→Linear14.6.4Tool Movement inOffset Mode CancelExplanationsD Tool movement aroundan inside corner(180°xα)

  • Page 347

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION321Tool path has two types, A and B; and they are selected by parameter SUP(No. 5003#0).αLSG40rLαSrCType AType BαLSG40LIntersectionrαSCrrLLG40LG40LProgrammed pathWorkpieceTool center pathLinear→LinearCircular→LinearLinear→LinearWor...

  • Page 348

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02322Tool path has two types, A and B : and they are selected by parameter SUP(No. 5003#0)αLSG40rLSCType AType BrαG40LLLLrrLLSrrCLLG42αG40LG42LαSLinear→LinearCircular→LinearProgrammed pathTool center pathWorkpieceWork-pieceTool center ...

  • Page 349

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION323Start positionrG40(G42)LLS1°or lessProgrammed pathTool center pathWhen a block without tool movement is commanded together with anoffset cancel, a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is producedin a normal direction to tool motion...

  • Page 350

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02324If a G41 or G42 block precedes a block in which G40 and I_, J_, K_ arespecified, the system assumes that the path is programmed as a path fromthe end position determined by the former block to a vector determinedby (I,J), (I,K), or (J,K). The ...

  • Page 351

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION325In the example shown below, the tool does not trace the circle more thanonce. It moves along the arc from P1 to P2. The interference checkfunction described in II–15.6.5 may raise an alarm. (I, J)N5N6N7P1P2(G41)N5 G01 G91 X100.0 ;N6 G02 J...

  • Page 352

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02326Tool overcutting is called interference. The interference check functionchecks for tool overcutting in advance. However, all interference cannotbe checked by this function. The interference check is performed even ifovercutting does not occur.(...

  • Page 353

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION327(2) In addition to the condition (1), the angle between the start point andend point on the tool center path is quite different from that betweenthe start point and end point on the programmed path in circularmachining(more than 180 degrees).Ce...

  • Page 354

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02328(1) Removal of the vector causing the interference When cutter compensation is performed for blocks A, B and C andvectors V1, V2, V3 and V4 between blocks A and B, and V5, V6, V7and V8 between B and C are produced, the nearest vectors are check...

  • Page 355

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION329(Example 2) The tool moves linearly from V1, V2, V7, to V8V6V3V5CCCrrV1V2V4V7V8AO1 O2BV4, V5 : InterferenceV3, V6 : InterferenceV2, V7 : No InterferenceProgrammed pathTool centerpath(2) If the interference occurs after correction (1), the too...

  • Page 356

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02330(1) Depression which is smaller than the cutter compensation valueTool center pathABCStoppedProgrammed pathThere is no actual interference, but since the direction programmed inblock B is opposite to that of the path after cutter compensation t...

  • Page 357

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION331When the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius, because theinner offsetting of the cutter will result in overcuttings, an alarm isdisplayed and the CNC stops at the start of the block. In single blockoperation, the overcutting i...

  • Page 358

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02332When machining of the step is commanded by circular machining in thecase of a program containing a step smaller than the tool radius, the pathof the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes reverse to theprogrammed direction. In this ca...

  • Page 359

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION333The above example should be modified as follows:ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊN1N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ;N3 G01 Z–250.0 ;N5 G01 Z–50.0 F100 ;N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;N6(500, 500)N3, N5:Move command for the Z axisAfter co...

  • Page 360

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02334Cutter compensation C is not performed for commands input from theMDI.However, when automatic operation using the absolute commands istemporarily stopped by the single block function, MDI operation isperformed, then automatic operation starts a...

  • Page 361

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION335A function has been added which performs positioning by automaticallycanceling a cutter compensation vector when G53 is specified in cuttercompensation C mode, then automatically restoring that cuttercompensation vector with the execution of th...

  • Page 362

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02336(1) G53 specified in offset modeWhen CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 Oxxxx;G90G41_ _;G53X_Y_; G00[Type A]Start–uprrss(G41G00)G53sG00[Type B]Start–uprrssG53sG00G00When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1G00[FS15 Type]rss(G41G00)G53sG00 (2)...

  • Page 363

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION337When CCN (bit2 of parameter No.5003)=1G90G00[FS15 Type]rss(G91G41G00)G53G00(3) G53 specified in offset mode with no movement specified When CCN (bit2 of parameter No.5003)=0Oxxxx;G90G41_ _;G00X20.Y20. ;G53X20.Y20. ; G00[Type A]Start–uprrss(G4...

  • Page 364

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02338WARNING1 When cutter compensation C mode is set and all–axis machine lock is applied, the G53command does not perform positioning along the axes to which machine lock is applied. Thevector, however, is preserved. When CCN (bit 2 of paramete...

  • Page 365

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION339NOTE1 When a G53 command specifies an axis that is not in the cutter compensation C plane, aperpendicular vector is generated at the end point of the previous block, and the tool does notmove. In the next block, offset mode is automatically re...

  • Page 366

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02340When G28, G30, or G30.1 is specified in cutter compensation C mode,an operation of FS15 type is performed if CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003) is set to 1.This means that an intersection vector is generated in the previous block,and a perpendicu...

  • Page 367

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION341(b) For return by G00When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) = 0G00[Type A](G42G01)G01srrssOxxxx;G91G41_ _ _;G28X40.Y0 ;G00[Type B]s(G42G01)G01srrssReference position or floatingreference positionReference position or floatingreference position...

  • Page 368

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02342When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) = 1G29[FS15 Type]G28/30/30.1s(G42G01)G01srsG01Intermediate position = return positionReference position or floatingreference position(b) For return by G00When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0Oxxxx;G91G41...

  • Page 369

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION343(3) G28, G30, or G30.1, specified in offset mode (with movement to a reference position not performed)(a) For return by G29When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0Oxxxx;G91G41_ _ _;G28X40.Y–40.;G29X40.Y40.;G29[Type A]rs(G42G01)[Type B]G28/30/3...

  • Page 370

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02344(4) G28, G30, or G30.1 specified in offset mode (with no movementperformed)(a) For return by G29When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0O××××;G91G41_ _ _;G28X0Y0;G29X0Y0;[Type A]rs(G41G01)[Type B]G28/30/30.1/G29(G41G01)G28/30/30.1/G29G01rsG0...

  • Page 371

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION345When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1G00[FS15 Type]G28/30/30.1(G41G01)G01rsReference position or floatingreference position=Intermediate positionWARNING1 When a G28, G30, or G30.1 command is specified during all–axis machine lock, aperpendi...

  • Page 372

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02346NOTE1 When a G28, G30, or G30.1 command specifies an axis that is not in the cutter compensationC plane, a perpendicular vector is generated at the end point of the previous block, and the tooldoes not move. In the next block, offset mode is a...

  • Page 373

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION347When G29 is specified in cutter compensation C mode, an operation ofFS15 type is performed if CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) is set to 1.This means that an intersection vector is generated in the previous block,and vector cancellation is per...

  • Page 374

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02348(b) For specification made other than immediately after automaticreference position returnWhen CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0O××××;G91G41_ _ _;G29X40.Y40.; [Type A]G29[Type B](G42G01)G01ssrssssr(G42G01)rrG01Return positionIntermediate p...

  • Page 375

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION349When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1G29[FS15 Type]G28/30/30.1(G42G01)G01srssReturn positionReference position or floatingreference position=Intermedi-ate position(b) For specification made other than immediately after automaticreference posi...

  • Page 376

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02350(3) G29 specified in offset mode (with movement to a reference positionnot performed)(a) For specification made immediately after automatic referenceposition returnWhen CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0O××××;G91G41_ _ _;G28X0Y0;G29X0Y0; [T...

  • Page 377

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION351(b) For specification made other than immediately after automaticreference position returnO××××;G91G41_ _ _;G29X0Y0; [Type A](G42G01)G29[Type B]s(G42G01)ssrssG29sG01G01G01G01Intermediate position=Return positionIntermediate position=Return ...

  • Page 378

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02352(4) G29 specified in offset mode (with movement to an intermediateposition and reference position not performed)(a) For specification made immediately after automatic referenceposition return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0O××××;G91...

  • Page 379

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION353(b) For specification made other than immediately after automaticreference position returnWhen CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0O××××;G91G41_ _ _;G29X0Y0;[Type A](G41G01)sr[Type B](G41G01)ssrG01G01G01G01sG29G29Intermediate position=return ...

  • Page 380

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02354By specifying G39 in offset mode during cutter compensation C, cornercircular interpolation can be performed. The radius of the corner circularinterpolation equals the compensation value. In offset modeorG39 ;;I_J_I_K_J_K_G39When the command...

  • Page 381

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION355X axisY axis(0.0, 10.0)(-10.0, 10.0)Block N1Offset vectorBlock N2Block N3Programmed pathTool center path(In offset mode)N1 Y10.0 ; N2 G39 ; N3 X-10.0 ; ........X axisY axis(In offset mode)N1 Y10.0 ; N2 G39 I–1.0 J2.0 ; N3 X-10.0 Y20.0 ;.......

  • Page 382

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02356In cutter compensation C, two–dimensional offsetting is performed for aselected plane. In three–dimensional tool compensation, the tool can beshifted three–dimensionally when a three–dimensional offset direction isprogrammed.D Start up...

  • Page 383

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION357In three–dimensional tool compensation mode, the following three–dimensional compensation vector is generated at the end of each block:Vx =pi ⋅ rVy =pj ⋅ rVz =pk ⋅ rp=i2 + j2 + k2p=i2 + j2 + k2G41G40Programmed pathPath after three–d...

  • Page 384

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02358Addresses I, J, and K must all be specified to start three–dimensional toolcompensation. When even one of the three addresses is omitted,two–dimensional cutter compensation C is activated. When a blockspecified in three–dimensional tool...

  • Page 385

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION359When one of the following G codes is specified in three–dimensional toolcompensation mode, the vector is cleared:G73Peck drilling cycleG74Reverse tapping cycleG76Fine boring G80Canned cycle cancelG81Drill cycle, spot boringG82Drill cycle, cou...

  • Page 386

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02360Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensationvalues and tool wear compensation (Fig. 14.8 (a)).OFSGOFSWOFSG:Geometric compensation valueOFSW:Wear compensation valueÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇReference positionFig. 14.8 (a) Geometric com...

  • Page 387

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION361Tool compensation memory A, B, or C can be used.The tool compensation memory determines the tool compensation valuesthat are entered (set) (Table 14.8 (b)).Table 14.8 (b) Setting contents tool compensation memory and tool compensation valueToo...

  • Page 388

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02362A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).The dimensions specified with X_, Y_, and Z_ can each be scaled up ordown with the same or different rates of magnification.The magnification rate can be specified in the program.Unless ...

  • Page 389

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION363Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001 It isdepended on parameter SCR (No. 5400#7) which value is selected. Then,set parameter SCLx (No.5401#0) to enable scaling for each axis. Ifscaling P is not specified on the ...

  • Page 390

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02364Even if different magnifications are applie to each axis in circularinterpolation, the tool will not trace an ellipse.When different magnifications are applied to axes and a circularinterpolation is specified with radius R, it becomes as follow...

  • Page 391

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION365This scaling is not applicable to cutter compensation values, tool lengthoffset values, and tool offset values (Fig. 14.9 (e) ).Cutter compensation values are not scaled.Programmed figureScaled figureFig. 14.9 (e) Scaling during cutter compens...

  • Page 392

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02366NOTE1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling.2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the following!results:(1)Circular command Direction of rotation is reversed.(2)Cutter compensation CO...

  • Page 393

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION367A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomespossible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation commandwhen a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from theprogrammed position on the machine.Further...

  • Page 394

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02368(α, β)XZCenter ofrotationAngle of rotation R (incremental value)Angle of rotation (absolute value)Fig. 14.10 (b) Coordinate system rotationNOTEWhen a decimal fraction is used to specify angulardisplacement (R_), the 1’s digit corresponds t...

  • Page 395

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION369In coordinate system rotation mode, G codes related to reference positionreturn (G27, G28, G29, G30, etc.) and those for changing the coordinatesystem (G52 to G59, G92, etc.) must not be specified. If any of these Gcodes is necessary, specify...

  • Page 396

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02370N1 G92 X0 Y0 G69 G01 ;N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 F1000 D01 ;N3 G68 R*30000 ;N4 G91 X2000 ;N5 G03 Y1000 R1000 J500 ;N6 G01 X*2000 ;N7 Y*1000 ;N8 G69 G40 G90 X0 Y0 M30 ;It is possible to specify G68 and G69 in cutter compensation C mode.The rotation ...

  • Page 397

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION3712. When the system is in cutter compensation model C, specify thecommands in the following order (Fig.14.10(e)) :(cutter compensation C cancel)G51 ; scaling mode startG68 ; coordinate system rotation start: G41 ;cutter compensation C mode start...

  • Page 398

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02372It is possible to store one program as a subprogram and recall subprogramby changing the angle.Programmed pathWhen offset isapplied(0, –10.0)Subprogram(0, 0)Sample program for when the RIN bit (bit 0 of parameter 5400) is setto 1. The specif...

  • Page 399

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION373When a tool with a rotation axis (C–axis) is moved in the XY plane duringcutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so thatthe C–axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 14.11 (a)). ToolToolProgrammed too...

  • Page 400

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02374Center of the arcFig. 14.11 (c) Normal direction control right (G42.1)Programmed pathCutter center pathFig. 14.11 (b) Normal direction control left (G41.1)Cutter center pathProgrammed path When viewed from the center of rotation around the C...

  • Page 401

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION375 SN1N2SN3SProgrammed pathS : Single block stop pointCutter center pathFig. 14.11 (e) Point at which a Single–Block Stop Occurs in the Normal Direction Control ModeBefore circular interpolation is started, the C–axis is rotated so that theC...

  • Page 402

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02376Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is executedat the feedrate set in parameter 5481. If dry run mode is on at that time,the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along the X–andY–axes in rapid t...

  • Page 403

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION377Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed withthe same normal direction as that of the preceding block.D Linear movementWhen distance N2, shown below, is smaller than the set value,machining for block N2 is performed using t...

  • Page 404

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02378A mirror image of a programmed command can be produced with respectto a programmed axis of symmetry (Fig. 14.12 (a)).Y100605050X60100(1)(2)(3)(4)(1) Original image of a programmed commandAxis of symmetry (X=50)Axis of symmetry(Y=50)(2) Image sy...

  • Page 405

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION379If the programmable mirror image function is specified when thecommand for producing a mirror image is also selected by a CNC externalswitch or CNC setting (see III–4.9), the programmable mirror imagefunction is executed first.Applying a mirr...

  • Page 406

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02380The grinding wheel compensation function creates a compensation vectorby extending the line between the specified compensation center and thespecified end point, on the specified compensation plane.Compensation vectorProgrammed pathTool center ...

  • Page 407

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION381A compensation vector is created by extending the line between thecompensation center and the specified end point. The length of thecompensation vector equals to the offset value corresponding to the offsetnumber specified with the D code.When...

  • Page 408

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02382Grinding wheel wear compensation can also be applied to circularinterpolation and helical interpolation. If the radius at the start pointdiffers from that at the end point, the figure does not become an arc; itbecomes a helix.Compensation vect...

  • Page 409

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION383(Example 1)When the compensation axes are the Y– and Z–axes andlinear interpolation is performed for the X– and Y–axesProgrammed path: a → b, compensated path: a’ → b’+Yaa’VayVbyb’bX+Paths on the XY plane+YVaya’aVbyb’b...

  • Page 410

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02384The rotary table dynamic fixture offset function saves the operator thetrouble of re–setting the workpiece coordinate system when the rotarytable rotates before cutting is started. With this function the operatorsimply sets the position of a...

  • Page 411

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION385When a command to move the tool about a rotation axis involved with afixture offset is specified in the G54.2 mode, the coordinates about therotation axis at the end of the block are used to calculate a vector. The toolis moved to the specifie...

  • Page 412

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02386YFXCWW: Workpiece origin offset valueF: Fixture offset corresponding to the reference angleSet the data on the fixture offset screen (See III–11.4). Eight groupsof data items can be specified.(3) Setting a parameter for enabling or disabling...

  • Page 413

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION387NOTEThe programmable data input function (G10) is required.(2) Reading and writing the data by a system variable of a custom macroSystem variable number = 5500 + 20:n + mThe following system variable number can be used to read and writethe refe...

  • Page 414

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02388(1) Relationship between the rotation axis and linear axesFirst group : 5(B–axis), 1(X–axis) , 3(Z–axis)Second group : 4(A–axis) , 3(Z–axis) , 2(Y–axis)Third group : 0, 0, 0(2) Reference angle and reference fixture offsetX : F0XY : ...

  • Page 415

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION389In the G54.2 mode, a change made to the setting of parameter No. 7580to 7588 or to the reference fixture offset becomes effective when the nextG54.2Pn is specified.It depends on the current continuous–state code of the 01 group whethera chang...

  • Page 416

    PROGRAMMING14. COMPENSATION FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02390ParameterParameter 7580=4 (C–axis)Parameter 7581=1 (X–axis)Parameter 7582=2 (Y–axis)Parameter 7583 to 7588=0Parameter 7575#0(X)=1 (The offset is valid for the X–axis.)7575#0(Y)=1 (The offset is valid for the Y–axis.)7570#0=0 (When bit...

  • Page 417

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION391N2YXZero POINT of the machine coordinate system[N3]N3N5N4C=180kC=90_CFig.14.14 (b) Example of fixture offsetWhen G54.2 P1 is specified in the N2 block, the fixture offset vector (0,10.0) is calculated. The vector is handled in the same way as...

  • Page 418

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/0239215 CUSTOM MACROAlthough subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, thecustom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logicoperations, and conditional branches for easy development of generalprograms such as pocketing an...

  • Page 419

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO393An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distancedirectly with a numeric value; examples are G100 and X100.0.With a custom macro, numeric values can be specified directly or usinga variable number. When a variable number is used,...

  • Page 420

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02394Local and common variables can have value 0 or a value in the followingranges :–1047 to –10–29010–29 to 1047If the result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an P/S alarm No. 111is issued.When a variable value is defined in a program, the de...

  • Page 421

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO395(b) Operation< vacant > is the same as 0 except when replaced by < vacant>When #1 = < vacant >When #1 = 0#2 = #1##2 = < vacant >#2 = #1##2 = 0#2 = #1*5##2 = 0#2 = #1*5##2 = 0#2 = #1+#1##2 = 0#2 = #1 + #1##2 = 0(c) Conditional ex...

  • Page 422

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02396D The mark ******** indicates an overflow (when the absolutevalue of a variable is greater than 99999999) or an underflow (whenthe absolute value of a variable is less than 0.0000001).Program numbers, sequence numbers, and optional block skip numberscan...

  • Page 423

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO397System variables can be used to read and write internal NC data such astool compensation values and current position data. Note, however, thatsome system variables can only be read. System variables are essentialfor automation and general–purpose pr...

  • Page 424

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02398Table 15.2 (d) System variables for tool compensation memory CTool length compensation (H)Cutter compensation(D)CompensationnumberGeometriccompensationWear compensationGeomet-ric com-pensationWearcom-pensation1:200:999#11001(#2201):#11201(#2400):#11999...

  • Page 425

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO399Time information can be read and written.Table 15.2 (f) System variables for time informationVariablenumberFunction#3001This variable functions as a timer that counts in 1–millisecondincrements at all times. When the power is turned on, the val-ue o...

  • Page 426

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02400Table 15.2 (h) System variable (#3004) for automatic operation control#3004Feed holdFeedrate OverrideExact stop0EnabledEnabledEnabled1DisabledEnabledEnabled2EnabledDisabledEnabled3DisabledDisabledEnabled4EnabledEnabledDisabled5DisabledEnabledDisabled6E...

  • Page 427

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO401Settings can be read and written. Binary values are converted todecimals.#9 (FCV) : Whether to use the FS15 tape format conversion capability#5 (SEQ) : Whether to automatically insert sequence numbers#2 (INI): Millimeter input or inch input#1 (ISO): Wh...

  • Page 428

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02402The number (target number) of parts required and the number (completionnumber) of machined parts can be read and written.Table 15.2(i) System variables for the number of parts required and thenumber of machined partsVariable numberFunction#3901Number o...

  • Page 429

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO403Position information cannot be written but can be read.Table 15.2 (k) System variables for position informationVariablenumberPositioninformationCoordinatesystemTool com-pensationvalueReadoperationduringmovement#5001–#5008Block end pointWorkpiececoord...

  • Page 430

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02404Workpiece zero point offset values can be read and written.Table 15.2 (l) System variables for workpiece zero point offset valuesVariablenumberFunction#5201:#5208First–axis external workpiece zero point offset value :Eighth–axis ex...

  • Page 431

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO405The following variables can also be used:AxisFunctionVariable numberFirst axisExternal workpiece zero point offsetG54 workpiece zero point offsetG55 workpiece zero point offsetG56 workpiece zero point offsetG57 workpiece zero point offsetG58 workpiece z...

  • Page 432

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02406The operations listed in Table 15.3(a) can be performed on variables. Theexpression to the right of the operator can contain constants and/orvariables combined by a function or operator. Variables #j and #K in anexpression can be replaced with a const...

  • Page 433

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO407S Specify the lengths of two sides, separated by a slash (/).S The solution ranges are as follows:When the NAT bit (bit 0 of parameter 6004) is set to 0: 0o to 360_[Example] When #1 = ATAN[–1]/[–1]; is specified, #1 is 225.0.When the NAT bit (bit ...

  • Page 434

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02408With CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by anoperation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the originalnumber, such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer.Conversely, when the absolute value of the integ...

  • Page 435

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO409Brackets ([, ]) are used to enclose an expression. Note that parenthesesare used for comments.Errors may occur when operations are performed.Table 15.3 (b) Errors involved in operationsOperationAverageerrorMaximumerrorType of errora = b*c1.55×10–10...

  • Page 436

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02410S Also be aware of errors that can result from conditional expressionsusing EQ, NE, GE, GT, LE, and LT.Example:IF[#1 EQ #2] is effected by errors in both #1 and #2, possibly resultingin an incorrect decision.Therefore, instead find the difference betwee...

  • Page 437

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO411The following blocks are referred to as macro statements:S Blocks containing an arithmetic or logic operation (=) S Blocks containing a control statement (such as GOTO, DO, END)S Blocks containing a macro call command (such as macro calls byG65, G66, G6...

  • Page 438

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02412In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTOstatement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetitionoperations are used:Branch and repetitionGOTO statement (unconditional branch)IF statement (conditional branch: if ..., then....

  • Page 439

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO413Operators each consist of two letters and are used to compare two valuesto determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater thanthe other value. Note that the inequality sign cannot be used.Table 15.5.2 OperatorsOperatorMeaningEQEqu...

  • Page 440

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02414The identification numbers (1 to 3) in a DO–END loop can be used asmany times as desired. Note, however, when a program includes crossingrepetition loops (overlapped DO ranges), P/S alarm No. 124 occurs.1. The identification numbers(1 to 3) can be us...

  • Page 441

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO415The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10.O0001;#1=0;#2=1;WHILE[#2 LE 10]DO 1;#1=#1+#2;#2=#2+1;END 1;M30;Sample program

  • Page 442

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02416A macro program can be called using the following methods:Macro callSimple call (G65)modal call (G66, G67)Macro call with G codeMacro call with M codeSubprogram call with M codeSubprogram call with T codeMacro call (G65) differs from subprogram call (M9...

  • Page 443

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO417When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called.Data (argument) can be passed to the custom macro program.G65 P p L <argument–specification> ;P : Number of the program to call: Repetition count (1 by default)Argument ...

  • Page 444

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02418Argument specification II Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J, andK up to ten times. Argument specification II is used to pass values suchas three–dimensional coordinates as arguments.ABCI1J1K1I2J2K2I3J3#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8...

  • Page 445

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO419S Local variables from level 0 to 4 are provided for nesting.S The level of the main program is 0.S Each time a macro is called (with G65 or G66), the local variable levelis incremented by one. The values of the local variables at the previouslevel are...

  • Page 446

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02420A macro is created which drills H holes at intervals of B degrees after astart angle of A degrees along the periphery of a circle with radius I.The center of the circle is (X,Y). Commands can be specified in eitherthe absolute or incremental mode. To ...

  • Page 447

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO421O9100;#3=#4003;Stores G code of group 3.G81 Z#26 R#18 F#9 K0; (Note) Drilling cycle.Note: L0 can also be used.IF[#3 EQ 90]GOTO 1;Branches to N1 in the G90 mode.. . . . . . . . #24=#5001+#24;Calculates the X coordinate of . . . . . . . . . . . . . the c...

  • Page 448

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02422S After G66, specify at address P a program number subject to a modalcall.S When a number of repetitions is required, a number from 1 to 9999 canbe specified at address L.S As with a simple call (G65), data passed to a macro program isspecified in argum...

  • Page 449

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO423G65 P9110 X x Y y Z z R r F f L l ;X: X coordinate of the hole (absolute specification only)(#24). . . . Y: Y coordinate of the hole (absolute specification only)(#25). . . . Z : Coordinates of position Z (absolute specification only)(#26). . . R...

  • Page 450

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02424O9010O9011O9012O9013O9014O9015O9016O9017O9018O90196050605160526053605460556056605760586059Program number Parameter numberAs with a simple call, a number of repetitions from 1 to 9999 can bespecified at address L.As with a simple call, two types of argum...

  • Page 451

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO425O9020O9021O9022O9023O9024O9025O9026O9027O9028O90296080608160826083608460856086608760886089Program number Parameter numberAs with a simple call, a number of repetitions from 1 to 9999 can bespecified at address L.As with a simple call, two types of argum...

  • Page 452

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02426O9001O9002O9003O9004O9005O9006O9007O9008O9009607160726073607460756076607760786079Program numberParameter numberAs with a simple call, a number of repetitions from 1 to 9999 can bespecified at address L.Argument specification is not allowed.An M code in ...

  • Page 453

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO427By using the subprogram call function that uses M codes, the cumulativeusage time of each tool is measured.S The cumulative usage time of each of tools T01 to T05 is measured.No measurement is made for tools with numbers greater than T05.S The following...

  • Page 454

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02428O9001(M03);Macro to start counting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M01;IF[#4120 EQ 0]GOTO 9;No tool specified. . . . . . . . . IF[#4120 GT 5]GOTO 9;Out–of–range tool number. . . . . . . . . #3002=0;Clears the timer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

  • Page 455

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO429For smooth machining, the CNC prereads the NC statement to beperformed next. This operation is referred to as buffering. During AIcontour control mode or AI nano contour control mode, the CNC prereadsnot only the next block but also the multiple blocks....

  • Page 456

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02430N1 X100.0 ;>> : Block being executedj : Block read into the bufferNC statementexecutionMacro statementexecutionBufferN1N2N3N4N2 #1=100 ;N3 #2=200 ;N4 Y200.0 ; :N4When N1 is being executed, the next NC statement (N4) is read into thebuffer. ...

  • Page 457

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO431N1 G01 G41 X100.0 G100 Dd ;>> : Block being executedj : Blocks read into the bufferN1N2N3N2 #1=100 ;N3 Y100.0 ;N4 #2=200 ;N5 M08 ;N6 #3=300 ;N7 X200.0 ; :N4N3N5N6N7NC statementexecutionMacro statementexecutionBufferWhen the N1 is being exec...

  • Page 458

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02432MeaningNote(In case not to command M code preventing buffer-ing or G53 block.)Number of VariableReadWriteTime informationReadWrite#3001,#3002The data is read / writ-ten at buffering a mac-ro program.Read#3011,#3012The data is read atbuffering a macro pr...

  • Page 459

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO433Example)O0001O2000N1 X10.Y10.;(Mxx ;) Specify preventing buffering M code or G53N2 M98P2000;N100 #1=#5041;(Reading X axis current position)N3 Y200.0; N101 #2=#5042;(Reading Y axis current position) : : M99;In above case, the buffering of N2 bl...

  • Page 460

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02434Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. They can beregistered and edited in the same way as subprograms. The storagecapacity is determined by the total length of tape used to store both custommacros and subprograms.15.8REGISTERINGCUSTOM MACR...

  • Page 461

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO435The macro call command can be specified in MDI mode. Duringautomatic operation, however, it is impossible to switch to the MDI modefor a macro program call.A custom macro program cannot be searched for a sequence number.Even while a macro program is b...

  • Page 462

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02436In addition to the standard custom macro commands, the following macrocommands are available. They are referred to as external outputcommands.– BPRNT– DPRNT– POPEN– PCLOSThese commands are provided to output variable values and charactersth...

  • Page 463

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO437Example )LF12 (0000000C)M–1638400(FFE70000)Y410 (0000019A)XSpaceCBPRNT [ C** X#100 [3] Y#101 [3] M#10 [0] ]Variable value #100=0.40956 #101=–1638.4 #10=12.34DPRNT [ a #b [ c d ] … ]Number of significant decimal placesNumber of sig...

  • Page 464

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02438Example )spspspspspspDPRNT [ X#2 [53] Y#5 [53] T#30 [20] ]Variable value #2=128.47398 #5=–91.2 #30=123.456(1) Parameter PRT(No.6001#1)=0L FTY –X9120012847423spLFT23Y–91.200X128.474(2) Parameter PRT(No.6001#1)=0PCLOS ;The PCLOS command releas...

  • Page 465

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO439NOTE1 It is not necessary to always specify the open command(POPEN), data output command (BPRNT, DPRNT), andclose command (PCLOS) together. Once an opencommand is specified at the beginning of a program, it doesnot need to be specified again except aft...

  • Page 466

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02440When a program is being executed, another program can be called byinputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function isreferred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program aninterrupt command in the following format:M96...

  • Page 467

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO441CAUTIONWhen the interrupt signal (UINT, marked by * in Fig. 15.11)is input after M97 is specified, it is ignored.And, the interrupt signal must not be input during execution of theinterrupt program.A custom macro interrupt is available only during progr...

  • Page 468

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02442There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram–typeinterrupts and macro–type interrupts. The interrupt type used is selectedby MSB (bit 5 of parameter 6003).(a) Subprogram–type interruptAn interrupt program is called as a subprogram....

  • Page 469

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO443(iii) If there are no NC statements in the interrupt program, control isreturned to the interrupted program by M99, then the program isrestarted from the command in the interrupted block.ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉExecution in progressNormal programInterru...

  • Page 470

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02444The interrupt signal becomes valid after execution starts of a block thatcontains M96 for enabling custom macro interrupts. The signal becomesinvalid when execution starts of a block that contains M97.While an interrupt program is being executed, the i...

  • Page 471

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO445There are two schemes for custom macro interrupt signal (UINT) input:The status–triggered scheme and edge– triggered scheme. When thestatus–triggered scheme is used, the signal is valid when it is on. Whenthe edge triggered scheme is used, the s...

  • Page 472

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02446To return control from a custom macro interrupt to the interruptedprogram, specify M99. A sequence number in the interrupted programcan also be specified using address P. If this is specified, the program issearched from the beginning for the specifie...

  • Page 473

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO447NOTEWhen an M99 block consists only of address O, N, P, L, orM, this block is regarded as belonging to the previous blockin the program. Therefore, a single–block stop does notoccur for this block. In terms of programming, the following and are basi...

  • Page 474

    PROGRAMMING15. CUSTOM MACROB–63534EN/02448(2) After control is returned to the interrupted program, modalinformation is specified again as necessary.O∆∆∆∆M96PxxxNffff;M99(Pffff);Oxxx;Interrupt signal (UINT)(Without P specification)Modify modalinformationModalinformation remainsunchanged...

  • Page 475

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0215. CUSTOM MACRO449When the interrupt signal (UINT) is input and an interrupt program iscalled, the custom macro modal call is canceled (G67). However, whenG66 is specified in the interrupt program, the custom macro modal callbecomes valid. When control is returned from...

  • Page 476

    PROGRAMMING16. PATTERN DATA INPUTFUNCTIONB–63534EN/0245016 PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTIONThis function enables users to perform programming simply by extractingnumeric data (pattern data) from a drawing and specifying the numericalvalues from the MDI panel. This eliminates the need for programmin...

  • Page 477

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0216. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION451Pressing the OFFSETSETTING key and [MENU] is displayed on the followingpattern menu screen. 1. TAPPING 2. DRILLING 3. BORING 4. POCKET 5. BOLT HOLE 6. LINE ANGLE 7. GRID 8. PECK 9. TEST PATRN10. BACKMENU : HOLE PATTERN ...

  • Page 478

    PROGRAMMING16. PATTERN DATA INPUTFUNCTIONB–63534EN/02452Menu title : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10 C11 C12C1,C2, ,C12 : Characters in the menu title (12 characters)Macro instructionG65 H90 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk :H90:Specifies the menu titlep : Assume a1 and a2 to be the codes of characters C1 and C...

  • Page 479

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0216. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION453Pattern name: C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10C1, C2, ,C10: Characters in the pattern name (10 characters)Macro instructionG65 H91 Pn Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ;H91: Specifies the menu titlen : Specifies the menu No. of the pattern namen=1 to 10 q : A...

  • Page 480

    PROGRAMMING16. PATTERN DATA INPUTFUNCTIONB–63534EN/02454Custom macros for the menu title and hole pattern names. 1. TAPPING 2. DRILLING 3. BORING 4. POCKET 5. BOLT HOLE 6. LINE ANGLE 7. GRID 8. PECK 9. TEST PATRN10. BACKMENU : HOLE PATTERN O0000 N00000> _MDI **** *** ***...

  • Page 481

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0216. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION455When a pattern menu is selected, the necessary pattern data isdisplayed.NO. NAME DATA COMMENT 500 TOOL 0.000 501 STANDARD X 0.000 *BOLT HOLE 502 STANDARD Y 0.000 CIRCLE*...

  • Page 482

    PROGRAMMING16. PATTERN DATA INPUTFUNCTIONB–63534EN/02456Menu title : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10C11C12C1 ,C2,…, C12 : Characters in the menu title (12 characters)Macro instructionG65 H92 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ;H92 : Specifies the pattern namep : Assume a1 and a2 to be the codes of characters C...

  • Page 483

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0216. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION457One comment line: C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12C1, C2,…, C12 : Character string in one comment line (12 characters)Macro instructionG65 H94 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ; H94 : Specifies the commentp : Assume a1 and a2 to be the codes of...

  • Page 484

    PROGRAMMING16. PATTERN DATA INPUTFUNCTIONB–63534EN/02458Macro instruction to describe a parameter title , the variable name, anda comment.NO. NAME DATA COMMENT 500 TOOL 0.000 501 STANDARD X 0.000 *BOLT HOLE 502 STANDARD Y 0.000 ...

  • Page 485

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0216. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION459Table. 16.3 (a) Characters and codes to be used for the pattern data input functionChar-acterCodeCommentChar-acterCodeCommentA0656054B0667055C0678056D0689057E069032SpaceF070!033Exclama–tion markG071”034QuotationmarkH072#035Hash signI...

  • Page 486

    PROGRAMMING16. PATTERN DATA INPUTFUNCTIONB–63534EN/02460Table 16.3 (b) Numbers of subprograms employed in the pattern data input functionSubprogram No.FunctionO9500Specifies character strings displayed on the pattern data menu.O9501Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding...

  • Page 487

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0217. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERENTRY (G10)46117 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY (G10)The values of parameters can be entered in a lprogram. This function isused for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments arechanged or the maximum cutting feedrate or cutting time c...

  • Page 488

    PROGRAMMING17. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERENTRY (G10)B–63534EN/024621. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404G10L50 ; Parameter entry modeN3404 R 00000100 ; SBP settingG11 ; cancel parameter entry mode 2. Change the values for the Z–axis (3rd axis) and A–axis (4th axis) inaxis type param...

  • Page 489

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0218. MEMORY OPERATION USINGFS15 TAPE FORMAT46318 MEMORY OPERATION USING FS15 TAPE FORMATMemory operation of the program registered by FS15 tape format ispossible with setting of the setting parameter (No. 0001#1).Data formats for cutter compensation, subprogram calling, a...

  • Page 490

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/0246419 HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS

  • Page 491

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS465This function can convert the machining profile to a data group that canbe distributed as pulses at high–speed by the macro compiler and macroexecutor. The function can also call and execute the data group as amachining cycle using th...

  • Page 492

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02466AlarmnumberDescriptions115The contents of the header are invalid. This alarm is issued inthe following cases.1. The header corresponding to the number of the specified callmachining cycle was not found.2. A cycle connection data value i...

  • Page 493

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS467When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial errorexists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. Anapproximation of this error can be obtained from the followingexpression: 0YXr∆r:Error∆r :Maxi...

  • Page 494

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02468A remote buffer can continuously supply a large amount of data to theCNC at high speeds when connected to the host computer or input/outputequipment via a serial interface.CNCRS–232–C / RS–422Remote bufferHost computerInput/output ...

  • Page 495

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS469VBinary input operation enabled :G05;VBinary input operation disabled :The travel distance alongall axes are set to zero.VData format for binary input operationL Data sequence1st axis2nd axisNth axisCheck byteByteHigh byteHigh byteHig...

  • Page 496

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02470**************1514131211109876543210000000000000111111Example: When the travel distance is 700 µm per unit time (millimeter machine with increment system IS–B)1514131211109876543210All bytes of the block except for the check byte ([2...

  • Page 497

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS471High–speed remote buffer A uses binary data. On the other hand,high–speed remote buffer B can directly use NC language coded withequipment such as an automatic programming unit to perform high–speedmachining.G05P01 ;Start high–s...

  • Page 498

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02472During high–speed machining, the distribution processing status ismonitored. When distribution processing terminates, P/S alarm No. 000and P/S alarm No. 179 are issued upon completion of the high–speedmachining command (according to...

  • Page 499

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS473The high–speed linear interpolation function processes a move commandrelated to a controlled axis not by ordinary linear interpolation but byhigh–speed linear interpolation. The function enables the high–speedexecution of an NC pr...

  • Page 500

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02474(Maximum feedrate) =122,848 (interpolation period)8(IS–B, metric input)Minimum feedrateInterpolation period: 8 msecInterpolation period: 4 msec(IS–B, metric input)4mm/min8mm/min(IS–B, inch input)0.38 inch/min0.76 inch/mim(IS–...

  • Page 501

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS475Single–block operation is disabled in high–speed linear interpolationmode.:G05 P2 ; X10 Z20 F1000 ; : : : Y30 ; G05 P0 ; :Handled as a single blockFeed hold is disabled in high–speed linear interpolation mode.The cutting feed over...

  • Page 502

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02476This function is designed for high–speed precise machining. With thisfunction, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in theservo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can besuppressed.The tool can the...

  • Page 503

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS477⋅ Inverse time feed⋅ High–precision contour control⋅ Axis control by the PMC(Bits 4 (G8R) and 3 (G8C) of parameter No. 8004 can be set to also usethis function in the look–ahead control mode.)⋅ Single direction positioning⋅...

  • Page 504

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02478The AI contour control/AI nano contour control function is provided forhigh–speed, high–precision machining. This function enablessuppression of acceleration/deceleration delays and servo delays thatbecome larger with increases in t...

  • Page 505

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS479The functions listed below are valid in the AI contour control/AI nanocontour control mode:⋅ Nano–interpolation (only in the AI nano contour control mode)⋅ Look–ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation⋅ Look...

  • Page 506

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02480Linear interpolation, circular interpolation, etc.DistributionpulseSpecifiedfeedrateLinear accelera-tion/deceleration before interpolationFeedrate calculationServo controlAcceleration/deceleration after interpolationInterpolation calcula...

  • Page 507

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS481Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed inthe AI contour control/AI nano contour control mode can be changed tobell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Withbell–shaped acceleration/d...

  • Page 508

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02482When the feedrate is changed, deceleration and acceleration areperformed as follows:For deceleration: Bell–shaped deceleration is started in the precedingblock so that deceleration terminates by the beginning of the block inwhich the f...

  • Page 509

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS483Feedrate along the X–axisN1N2N2N1F1000 F500F1000 F500F1000 F500N2N1Tool path when decelerationis not performed at the cornerTool path when deceleration isperformed at the cornerN1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ;N2 Y100. ;FeedrateFeedrateFeedrate...

  • Page 510

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02484When continuous minute straight lines form curves as shown in theexample in the figure below, the feedrate difference for each axis at eachcorner is not so large. For this reason, deceleration according to thefeedrate difference is not ...

  • Page 511

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS485N9N5N1N9N5N1The maximum allowable feedrate v for an arc of radius r specified in aprogram is calculated using the arc radius R and maximum allowablefeedrate V (setting of a parameter) for the radius as follows so that theacceleration in ...

  • Page 512

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02486By setting the corresponding parameter, the linear or non–linearinterpolation type can be selected. (In the AI nano contour control mode,the non–linear interpolation type cannot be selected.)When the linear interpolation type is sel...

  • Page 513

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS487tbtbtbtbtatatctcFeedrateTime Linear acceleration/deceleration Bell–shaped acceleration/decelerationtaDepends on the linear acceleration.tbTime constant for bell–shaped acceleration/decelerationtcBell–shaped acceleration/deceleratio...

  • Page 514

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02488If the feedrate during movement is F, the acceleration for linearacceleration/deceleration is A, the time constant for bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration is T, the time required for acceleration/deceleration can be obtained as follow...

  • Page 515

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS489During involute interpolation, the following overrides are applied to thespecified cutting feedrate. By this function, a good cutting surface withhigher machining precision can be obtained.(1) Override for inward offset in cutter compen...

  • Page 516

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02490(2) Override near the base circleIn a part near the base circle where the change in the curvature of theinvolute curve is relatively significant, cutting at the feedrate as specifiedin the program may put a heavy load on the cutter, resu...

  • Page 517

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS491NOTE1 When the override near the base circle is enabled, theoverride for inward offset in cutter compensation is disabled.These overrides cannot be enabled simultaneously.2 When the distance from the center of the base circle to thestart...

  • Page 518

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02492(3) Parameter related to feedrate clamping by accelerationParameter numberParameterNormalAd-vancedpreviewcontrolAI contourParameter for determining the allowable ac-celerationNone1785(4) Parameters related to feedrate clamping by arc rad...

  • Page 519

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS493ParameterParameter numberParameterAI contourAd-vancedpreviewcontrolNormalArc radius corresponding to the upper fee-drate limit1731* For AI nano–contour control, the rapid traverse movement type is not setwith a parameter, but is always...

  • Page 520

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/024942) When the total distance of blocks read in advance reaches the distancefor decelerating from the current feedrate, deceleration is started.When look–ahead operation proceeds and the total distance of blocksincreases by termination of...

  • Page 521

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS495NameFunctionMachine lockf When the machine lock signal for each axis(MLK1 to MLK8) is turned on or off, accelera-tion/deceleration is not applied to the axis forwhich machine lock is performed.Stroke check before movement Mirror imagefSt...

  • Page 522

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02496NameFunctionSkip function (G31)f(*1)High–speed skip function (G31)f(*1)Continuous high–speed skip(G31) Multistage skip function (G31 Px)f(*1)Reference position return (G28)f(*1)To execute G28 in the status in which the refer-ence pos...

  • Page 523

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS497NameFunctionInverse time feed (G93)fOverride cancelfExternal decelerationfLook–ahead bell–shaped accel-eration/deceleration before inter-polationfHigh–precision contour control(G05P10000)fNURBS interpolation (G06.2) Program inputf ...

  • Page 524

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02498NameFunctionThree–dimensional coordinateconversion (G68) Programmable mirror image (G51.1)fFigure copy (G72.1, G72.2) Retrace F15 tape formatfAuxiliary functions/spindle–speed functionsf : Can be specified. : Cannot be specified.Nam...

  • Page 525

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS499Other functionsf : Can be specified. : Cannot be specified.NameFunctionCycle start/feed holdfDry runfSingle blockfSequence number comparisonand stopfProgram restartf For the time constant for acceleration/decelera-tion during movement t...

  • Page 526

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02500Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such errors includemachining errors caused by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.To eliminate these errors, the following functions are performed at highspeed by an RISC processor. T...

  • Page 527

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS501G73, G74, G76, G81 to G89: Canned cycle, rigid tappingG80: Canned cycle cancelG90: Absolute commandG91: Incremental commandDxxx: Specifying a D code Fxxxxx : Specifying an F code Nxxxxx : Specifying a sequence number G05P10000 : Setting ...

  • Page 528

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02502In the HPCC mode, specifying unspecifiable data causes an alarm No.5000. To specify a program containing unspecifiable data, specify G05P0to exit from the HPCC mode before specifying the program.< Sample program >O0001 ;G05P10000 ...

  • Page 529

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS503S When the offset mode is canceled temporarilyIn the HPCC mode, automatic reference position return (G28) andautomatic return from the reference position (G29) cannot bespecified. Therefore, commands that must cancel the offset modetemp...

  • Page 530

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02504(2) When a block containing no movement operation is specified togetherwith the cutter compensation cancel code (G40), a vector with a lengthequal to the offset value is created in a direction perpendicular to themovement direction of th...

  • Page 531

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS505When bit 1 of parameter MSU No. 8403 is set to 1, G00, M, S, T, and Bcodes can be specified even in HPCC mode. When specifying these codesin HPCC mode, note the following:(1)When a G00, M, S, T, or B code is specified in cutter compensa...

  • Page 532

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02506(2)When G00 is specified with bit 7 of parameter SG0 No. 8403 set to 1,the following points should be noted:⋅Since the G00 command is replaced by the G01 command, the tool moves at the feedrate set in parameter No. 8481 even when data ...

  • Page 533

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS507Before G05P10000 can be specified, the following modal values must beset. If they are not set, the P/S alarm No. 5012 is issued.G codeMeaning G13.1 Cancels polar coordinate interpolation. G15 Cancels a polar coordinate command. G40 C...

  • Page 534

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02508In Look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation, the speed during acceleration/deceleration is as shown inthe figure below.SpecifiedspeedSpeedNon–linearacceleration/decelerationNon–linearacceleration/decel...

  • Page 535

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS509Linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching specified acceleration/decelerationSpecifiedspeedSpeedTimeT1T1T2Fig.19.9 (b)If linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching the specified accelerationoccurs in AI contour control (AICC) mod...

  • Page 536

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02510Non–linear acceleration/decelerationSpecified speedSpeedT1’T2’T2’TimeFig.19.9 (c)The acceleration/deceleration reference speed is the feedrate used as thereference for calculating optimum acceleration. In Fig.19.9 (c), it isequi...

  • Page 537

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS511If an F command is used in a G05.1 Q1 (AICC or AI nanoCC) block orG05 P10000 (AI–HPCC or AI–nanoHPCC) block, the speed specifiedwith the F command is assumed the acceleration/deceleration referencespeed.This acceleration/deceleration...

  • Page 538

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02512The speed specified with the F command issued when a cutting blockgroup (such as G01 and G02) starts is assumed theacceleration/deceleration reference speed, This method is used if the G05.1Q1 block or G05 P10000 block does nothave an F ...

  • Page 539

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS513(2) A proper acceleration is determined under the condition that theacceleration change must be about the same as the setting so thatparameter changes do not cause considerable shock to the machine,that is:Acceleration after changeAccele...

  • Page 540

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02514This function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with thetorque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of the machinesdue to its friction and gravity and performs linear type positioning withoptimum acceleratio...

  • Page 541

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS515SpeedAcc/Dec pattern can be changed in each condition.AccelerationAccelerationand+ moveDecelerationand+ moveAccelerationand– moveDecelerationand– moveTimeTimeFig.19.10 (b) Acceleration/deceleration with this functionOptimum torque a...

  • Page 542

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02516Table. 19.10 (a) Optimum torque acceleration/decelerationFAP19540#0FRP19501#5Referenceaccelera–tionBell–shapedaccelerationchange timeAccelerationpattern11Before–interpolationacc/dec forrapidtraverseNo.1420&No.1773No.1774See ...

  • Page 543

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS517Set the speed and the acceleration at each of the acceleration setting pointsP0 to P5 for each condition, plus movement and acceleration, plusmovement and deceleration, minus movement and acceleration, minusmovement and deceleration, and...

  • Page 544

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02518In this example, the machine is equipped with the aM30/4000i?.Motor speed at rapid traverse is 3000 (min–1).05010015001000200030004000Speed(min-1)Torque(Nm)Fig.19.10 (d) Speed–torque characteristics of model a30/4000iSpecifications ...

  • Page 545

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS519Let the torque be x (Nm), the inertia be y(Kgm2), and the ball screw pitchp(mm), then the acceleration A is calculated as follows:A + x[N @ m]y[kg @ m2] p2p [mm] +x([kg @ m sec2][m])y[kg @ m2] p2p [mm]+ x p2p y [mm sec2]Machine specifica...

  • Page 546

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02520Table. 19.10 (c) Example of setting parameters related toacceleration pattern (2/2)ParameterNo.SettingUnitRemarksAccelera-tion at P119546,1955219558,19564187120.01% At P1, 90(Nm) can be used forthe acceleration/deceleration,so set the r...

  • Page 547

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS521From the effect of gravity and friction, torque for acceleration/decelerationis different on each condition, such as acceleration, deceleration or plus move(up), minus move (down).The following example is for the vertical axis and gravit...

  • Page 548

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02522Parameter setting is as follows,ParameterNo.SettingUnitRemarksAccel-eration atP019545145540.01%At P0, 70(Nm) can be used forthe acceleration/deceleration, soset the ratio 6002 (mm/sec2) to4124 (mm/sec2). 1.4554 =6002/4124Accel-eration at...

  • Page 549

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS52305010015001000200030004000Speed(min–1)P0P1P5Torque(Nm)Fig.19.10(i) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of + move and decelerationParameter setting is as follows,ParameterNo.SettingUnitRemarksAccel-eration atP019557270270.01%At P0, 130(Nm) can ...

  • Page 550

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02524(3) In case of minus move (down) and accelerationBecause torque of Gravity works forward to the output torque of motorand torque of friction works against the output torque of motor, torque foracceleration/deceleration is as follows.Maxi...

  • Page 551

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS525(4) In case of minus move (down) and decelerationBecause torque of Gravity works against the output torque of motor andtorque of friction works forward to the output torque of motor, torque foracceleration/deceleration is as follows.Maxi...

  • Page 552

    PROGRAMMING19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02526P1P001000200030004000500060007000800090000160003200048000Speed (mm/min)P5Acceleration (mm/sec )2Fig.19.10(n) Acceleration pattern in case of – move and decelerationWhen Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is enabled, linear typep...

  • Page 553

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS52720 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS

  • Page 554

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02528It is possible to change the operating mode for two or more specified axesto either synchronous operation or normal operation by an input signalfrom the machine.Synchronous control can be performed for up to four pairs of axes withthe Series 1...

  • Page 555

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS529This operating mode is used for machining different workpieces on eachtable. The operation is the same as in ordinary CNC control, where themovement of the master axis and slave axis is controlled by theindependent axis address (Y and V). It...

  • Page 556

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02530In synchronous axis control, commands that require no axis motion, suchas the workpiece coordinate system setup command (G92) and the localcoordinate system setup command (G52), are set to the Y axis by programcommand Yyyyy issued to the maste...

  • Page 557

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS531The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis fromoverflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 0 ofparameter ROAx 1008 to 1.For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in thecommand....

  • Page 558

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02532This function controls a rotary axis as specified by an absolute command.With this function, the sign of the value specified in the command isinterpreted as the direction of rotation, and the absolute value of thespecified value is interpreted...

  • Page 559

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS533To replace the tool damaged during machining or to check the status ofmachining, the tool can be withdrawn from a workpiece. The tool canthen be advanced again to restart machining efficiently.The tool withdrawal and return operation consists...

  • Page 560

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02534When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator’s panelis turned on during automatic operation or in the automatic operation stopor hold state, the tool is retracted the length of the programmed retractiondistance. This operation is c...

  • Page 561

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS535If the origin, presetting, or workpiece origin offset value (or Externalworkpiece origin offset value) is changed after retraction is specified withG10.6 in absolute mode, the change is not reflected in the retractionposition. After such chan...

  • Page 562

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02536When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by onlyone motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis.Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The submotor is usedonly to produce torque. With this ...

  • Page 563

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS537When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90° with theperpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distancetraveled along each axis according to the inclination angle. For theordinary angular axis control function...

  • Page 564

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02538An absolute and a relative position are indicated in the programmedCartesian coordinate system.A machine position indication is provided in the machine coordinatesystem where an actual movement is taking place according to aninclination angle....

  • Page 565

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS539When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be usedto grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, whilethe grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being movedvertically, a contour program can b...

  • Page 566

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02540The chopping feedrate is clamped to the maximum chopping feedrate (setwith parameter No. 8375) if the specified feedrate is greater than themaximum chopping feedrate.The feedrate can be overridden by 0% to 150% by applying the choppingfeedrate...

  • Page 567

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS541(2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from theupper dead point to the lower dead pointPrevious upper dead pointNew lower dead pointPrevious lower dead pointThe tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, then to the u...

  • Page 568

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02542When high–speed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servodelay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These delays prevent thetool from actually reaching the specified position. The control unitmeasures the difference betwe...

  • Page 569

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS543If the mode is changed during chopping, chopping does not stop. Inmanual mode, the chopping axis cannot be moved manually. It can,however, be moved manually by means of the manual interrupt.When a reset is performed during chopping, the tool...

  • Page 570

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02544When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) andstopping chopping (G80), an attempt to restart that program results in aP/S 5050 alarm being output.When a program that does not include the chopping axis is restartedduring chop...

  • Page 571

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS545Gears can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync with therotation of the spindle (hob axis) connected to a hob.Also, a helical gear can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in syncwith the motion of the Z–axis (axial feed a...

  • Page 572

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02546Synchronization between the hob axis and C–axis can also be canceledwhen:⋅ The power is turned off.⋅ An emergency stop or servo alarm occurs.⋅ A reset (external reset signal, reset & rewind signal, or reset key on theMDI panel) is ...

  • Page 573

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS5471 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1(a)+Z +C – Z(b)+Z +C – Z(c)+Z +C – Z(d)+Z +C – ZC : +Z : +P : +Compensation direction: +(e)+Z – C – Z(f)+Z– C – Z(g)+Z – C – Z(h)+Z – C – ZC : +Z : +P: ...

  • Page 574

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02548The Z–axis (axial feed axis) is usually the third axis. However, any axiscan be set as the Z–axis by setting the corresponding parameterappropriately (parameter No. 7709).The servo delay is proportional to the speed of the hob axis. Ther...

  • Page 575

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS549⋅ Method in which compensation for the delay when a command isspecified is performed (G82, G83)G82: Cancels C–axis servo delay compensation.G83: Executes C–axis servo delay compensation.(Example)G81 T__L__ ;··· Starts synchronization....

  • Page 576

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02550S In C–axis servo delay compensation (G83), compensation is notapplied to the integer part of the gear pitch. The compensationdirection is opposite to that of the C–axis rotation.S C–axis handle interruptDuring synchronization between t...

  • Page 577

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS551In the same way as with the hobbing machine function, to machine(grind/cut) a gear, the rotation of the workpiece axis connected to a servomotor is synchronized with the rotation of the tool axis (grindingwheel/hob) connected to the spindle mo...

  • Page 578

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/025521 Start of synchronizationWhen synchronization mode is set with G81, the synchronizationswitch of the EGB function is closed, and synchronization between thetool axis and workpiece axis starts. At this time, synchronizationmode signal SYNMOD ...

  • Page 579

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS553When a helical gear is to be produced, the compensation of workpiece axisrotation is needed according to the travel distance on the Z–axis (axialfeed).Helical gear compensation is performed by adding compensation pulsescalculated from the fo...

  • Page 580

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/025541 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1(a)C : +Z : +P : +Compensationdirection: ++C+Z– Z(b)+C+Z– Z(c)+C+Z– Z(d)+C+Z– ZC : +Z : +P: –Compensationdirection: –C : +Z: –P : +Compensationdirection: –C : ...

  • Page 581

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS555In helical compensation, the machine coordinates and absolutecoordinates of the workpiece axis (4th axis) are updated by the amount ofhelical compensation.By turning on the retract signal RTRCT (on a rising edge) in automaticoperation mode or ...

  • Page 582

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02556O1000 ;N0010 M19 ;Performs tool axis orientation.N0020 G28 G91 C0 ;Performs reference position returnoperation of the workpiece axis.N0030 G81 T20 L1 ;Starts synchronization between the toolaxis and workpiece axis. (The workpiece a...

  • Page 583

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS557G81 T_ L_ ;(EGB mode on)G31.8 G91 a0 P_ Q_ R_ ;(EGB skip command)a : EGB axis (Work axis)P : The top number of the consecutive custom macro variables in which the machine coordinate positions of the EGB axis (workaxis) at the skip signal input...

  • Page 584

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02558NOTE1 In the G31.8 block, only the EGB axis (work axis) should becommanded. When another axis is commanded, the P/Salarm (No.5068) will occur.2 If P is not specified in the G31.8 block, the P/S alarm(No.5068) will occur.3 If R is not specified...

  • Page 585

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS559A gear can be shaped (grind/cut) by the synchronization of the workpieceaxis rotation to the tool axis (grinding axis /hob) rotation by using twospindles as a tool axis and a workpiece axis. To synchronize these twoaxes, the Electronic gear bo...

  • Page 586

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02560–+ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔVelocitycontrol (PI)ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔPositioncontrolPosition gainÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔCs commandCNC...

  • Page 587

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS561NOTESpecify G81 and G80 code only in a block.The following parameters should be set for the Spindle EGB control.(1) Master axis number (Parameter No.7771) * Only Cs contour axis(2) Slave axis number (Parameter No.7710)(3) Number of position de...

  • Page 588

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02562Synchronization startcommand (G81)Synchronization modeSynchronization mode signalSYNMOD<F65#6>Tool axis rotation commandTool axis stop commandTool axis rotation speedWork piece axis rotationspeedSynchronization cancelcommand (G80)Fig. 20...

  • Page 589

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS563N00100 G01 X_ F_ ; Makes movement on the X–axis(for retraction).N00110 Myy ; Stops the tool axis.N00120 G80 ; Cancels synchronization.N00130 M30 ;When a helical gear is to be produced, the compensation ...

  • Page 590

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02564(1) When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No.7700 is 1. (a)+Z +C – Z (b)+Z +C – Z (c)+Z +C – Z (d)+Z +C – ZC : +Z : +P : +Cmp. direc. : +C : +Z : +P: –Cmp. direc. : –C : +Z: –P : +Cmp. d...

  • Page 591

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS565The synchronous ratio of the Spindle EGB control is internallyrepresented using a fraction. The fraction is calculated from T and Lcommand in G81 block and the number of position detector pulses perrotation about the tool and the workpiece axi...

  • Page 592

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02566Position feedback–+360000036000360000360000++–Master axisCs commandEGBSlave axisCs command360000*K2/K1(*1/10)*CMR(*1)MotorWorkpieceDetectorK2/K1 : Synchronous ratio*CMR(*1)MotorTool axisDetectorFig. 20.8.3 (d) Pulse distributionAs Fig. 20...

  • Page 593

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS567– Interlock– Feed hold – Machine lock3) The EGB synchronization should be started and canceled at the stopof the master and the slave axis. It means that the tool axis (masteraxis) rotation should be started while the synchronization mod...

  • Page 594

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02568Num-berMessageContents010IMPROPER G–CODEParameters for axis setting are not set cor-rectly regarding G81. (No.7710,7771,4352,or Cs axis setting).Confirm the parameter setting.181FORMAT ERROR ING81 BLOCKG81 block format error1)T(number of tee...

  • Page 595

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS569Synchronizationcancellation commandSynchronization start commandWorkpiece–axis speedSynchronizationstateAccelerationDecelerationSpindlespeedAutomaticphasesynchronizationSynchronization start commandWorkpiece–axis speedSpindlespeedSynchroni...

  • Page 596

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02570G81 T_ L_ R2;Synchronization startG80 R2;Synchronization endT : Number of teeth (range of valid settings: 1–1000)L : Number of hob threads (range of valid settings: –21 to +21, excluding 0)When L is positive, the direction of rotation ab...

  • Page 597

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS5713. When G80R1 is specified, the EGB mode check signal is set to 0, anddeceleration according to the acceleration rate set in the parameter(No. 2135,2136 or No.4384,4385) is started immediately. When thespeed is reduced to 0, the G80R1 block ...

  • Page 598

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/025722. Specify G81R2 to start synchronization.When G81R2 is specified, the workpiece axis is accelerated with theacceleration according to the acceleration rate set in the parameter(No.2135,2136 or No.4384,4385). When the synchronization speed is...

  • Page 599

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS573CAUTION1 In automatic phase synchronization, specify the speed in parameter No.7776 and themovement direction in parameter PHD, bit 7 of No. 7702.In phase synchronization, rapid–traverse linear acceleration/deceleration (with the timeconstan...

  • Page 600

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02574M03 ;Clockwise spindle rotation commandG81 T_ L_ R1 ;Synchronization start commandG00 X_ ;Positions the workpiece at the machining position. Machining in the synchronous stateG00 X_ ;Retract the workpiece from the tool.G81 T_ L_ R1 ;Sy...

  • Page 601

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS575The EGB automatic phase synchronization is made on the premise thatthe rotation of the slave axis is the same direction as the master axis. Referto the following chart.+ Command+ FeedbackKp/SKp/SMotor+ –+ Feedback+ EGB command+ –+ Directi...

  • Page 602

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02576The Electronic Gear Box is a function for rotating a workpiece in sync witha rotating tool, or to move a tool in sync with a rotating workpiece. With thisfunction, the high–precision machining of gears, threads, and the like can beimplemente...

  • Page 603

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS577NOTEA sampling period of 1 ms is applied when feedback pulsesare read from the master axis; the synchronization pulsesfor a slave axis are calculated according to synchronizationcoefficient K; and the pulses are specified for positioncontrol o...

  • Page 604

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02578NOTE1 A manual handle interruption can be issued to the slave axisor other axes during synchronization.2 The maximum feedrates for the master axis and the slaveaxis are limited according to the position detectors used.3 An inch/metric conversi...

  • Page 605

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS579G81 T_(L_)(Q_P_);T : Number of teeth (range of valid settings: 1 to 1000)L : Number of hob threads (range of valid settings: –21 to +21, excluding 0) The sign of L determines the direction of rotation for the workpiece axis. When L is positi...

  • Page 606

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02580Compensation angle +Z Q sin(P)p T 360 (In inch input)Where,Compensation angle : Absolute value with sign (degrees)Z: Amount of travel along the Z axis after a G81 command is issued (mm or inch)P: Twisted angle of the gear with sign (degrees)p...

  • Page 607

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS581(1) When the master axis is the spindle, and the slave axis is the C–axis1. G81.5 T10 C0 L1 ;Synchronization between the master axis and C–axis is started atthe ratio of one rotation about the C–axis to ten rotations about themaster ...

  • Page 608

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02582Performs spindle orientation.Positions the C–axis.Starts synchronization at the ratio ofone rotation about the C–axis to tenspindle rotations.Rotates the spindle.Makes movements for grinding.Stops the spindle.Positions the dressing axis.St...

  • Page 609

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS583O1234 ;........... ........... N01 G81 T20 L1 ; Starts synchronization with the spindle and C–axis at the ratio of a 1/20 rotation about theC–axis to one spindle rotation.N02 Mxx S300 ;Rotates the spindle at 300 min–1.N03 X... F... ;M...

  • Page 610

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02584Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Fig.20.8.5,suppose that the spindle and V–axis are as follows:Spindle pulse coder: 72000pulse/rev (4 pulses forone A/B phase cycle)C–axis least command increment : 0.001 degreeC–axi...

  • Page 611

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS585Both Kn and Kd are within the allowable range. No alarm isoutput.In this sample program, when T1 is specified for the master axis,the synchronization ratio (fraction) of the CMR of the C–axis tothe denominator Kd can always be reduced to low...

  • Page 612

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02586Ps: (Amount of V–axis movement) CMR 254 B 100 → 10000 5 254 B 100KnKd+ 10000 5 25472000 100+ 12772Both Kn and Kd are within the allowable range. No alarm isoutput.(c) For a millimeter machine and inch inputCommand : G81.5 T1 V0.0013 ;Op...

  • Page 613

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS587Ps: (Amount of C–axis movement) CMR → 3260 1 B 2KnKd+ 3260 172000 2 + 1637200(a) causes an alarm to be output because the values cannot beabbreviated. (b) causes no alarm because the ratio of the traveldistances can be abbreviated to a si...

  • Page 614

    PROGRAMMING20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/025881004#7 Ten times minimum input increment1001#0 Inch/metric switching (rotation axis/linear axis)1006#1 Shape of machine coordinate system (rotation axis/linearaxis)1006#2 Shape of machine coordinate system for pitch error compensation (rotatio...

  • Page 615

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS589Num-berMessageContentsP/S 181FORMAT ERROR ING81 BLOCKFormat error in the block in which EGBwas specified(1) The axis during synchronization byEGB is specified by G81.5 again.(2) U–axis is specified by G81.5/G80.5with U–axis control.(3) For...

  • Page 616

    PROGRAMMING21. TWO–PATH CONTROLFUNCTIONB–63534EN/0259021 TWO-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION

  • Page 617

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0221. TWO–PATH CONTROLFUNCTION591The two–path control function is designed for use on a machining centerwhere two systems are operated independently to simultaneously performcutting.The operations of two path are programmed independently of each other,and each program i...

  • Page 618

    PROGRAMMING21. TWO–PATH CONTROLFUNCTIONB–63534EN/02592Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the otherduring machining. By specifying an M code in a machining program foreach path, the two paths can wait for each other at a specified block. Whenan M code for waiting i...

  • Page 619

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0221. TWO–PATH CONTROLFUNCTION593NOTE1 An M code for waiting must always be specified in a single block.2 If one path is waiting because of an M code for waiting specified, and a different M code forwaiting is specified with the other path, an P/S alarm (No. 160) is raise...

  • Page 620

    PROGRAMMING21. TWO–PATH CONTROLFUNCTIONB–63534EN/02594A machine with two paths have different custom macro commonvariables and tool compensation memory areas for path 1 and 2. Paths 1and 2 can share the custom macro common variables and toolcompensation memory areas provided certain paramet...

  • Page 621

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0221. TWO–PATH CONTROLFUNCTION595In a CNC supporting two–path control, specified machining programscan be copied between the two paths by setting bit 0 (PCP) of parameterNo. 3206 to 1. A copy operation can be performed by specifying eithera single program or a range. ...

  • Page 622

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/0259622 RISC PROCESSORThe following functions are executed at high speed with RISC processor.D AI high precision contour controlD AI NANO high precision contour controlD Cylindrical interpolation cutting point controlD Tool center point controlD Tool axis ...

  • Page 623

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR597The state to execute the each function of AI high precision contourcontrol, AI NANO high precision contour control, Tool center pointcontrol, Tool axis compensation in tool axis direction, 3–dimensionalcutter compensation and 3–dimensional circula...

  • Page 624

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02598S External operation function–G81S Chopping function–G81.1S Setting a workpiece coordinate system–G92S Workpiece coordinate system preset–G92.1S Feed per revolution–G95S Constant surface speed control–G96,G97S Infeed control–G160,G161The...

  • Page 625

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR599– MDI interventionWhen the following function is used, the function which executed withRISC processor cannot be used.S Angular axis controlS Arbitary angular axis controlThe following modal G code are placed in the cleared state when the resetis e...

  • Page 626

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02600ItemSpecificationsNoteAxis controlControlled axes3 axesControlled paths1–pathSimultaneously controlled axes2 axesControlled axis expansionUp to 8 axesSimultaneously controlled axis expan-sionUp to 6 axesAxis control by PMCThe axis which is used in t...

  • Page 627

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR601NoteSpecificationsItemAxis controlInterlockAll axes/each axisMachine lockAll axes/each axisEmergency stopStored stroke check 1The stroke limit cannot be set by thestroke limit external setting signal in theAI high precision contour control modeor in t...

  • Page 628

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02602ItemSpecificationsNoteInterpolation functionsPositioningG00The AI high precision contour controlfunction or AI nano high precision con-tour control functions except the ad-vanced preview feed–forward function, multi buffer function , and the nanoin...

  • Page 629

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR603NoteSpecificationsItemFeed functionsBell–type acceleration/deceleration ofcutting feed after interpolationFeedrate override0 to 254% (1% step)2nd. Feedrate override0 to 254% (1% step)F1 digit feedUsing the manual pulse generator cannot change Fe...

  • Page 630

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02604NoteSpecificationsItemProgram inputProgrammable parameter inputG10The AI high precision contour controlmode or the AI nano high precisioncontour control mode is automaticallycanceled once and the buffering is in-hibited if this function is used in the...

  • Page 631

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR605NoteSpecificationsItemMiscellaneous/spindle functionsMiscellaneous functionThe AI high precision contour controlmode or the AI nano high precisioncontour control mode is automaticallycanceled once and the buffering is in-hibited if this function is us...

  • Page 632

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02606NoteSpecificationsItemTool functions3–dimensional tool compensationG41.2,G42.2G41.3The command which automaticallycancel AI high precision contour con-trol mode or AI nano high precisioncontour control mode can not be used.However M,S,T and B comman...

  • Page 633

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR607This function is designed to achieve high–speed, high–precisionmachining with a program involving a sequence of very small straightlines and NURBS curved lines, like those used for metal die machining.This function can suppress the servo system de...

  • Page 634

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02608(1) Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation or bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration before interpolation(Acceleration change time constant type)(2) Deceleration function based on feedrate differences at corners(3) Advanced feed–forwa...

  • Page 635

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR609Acceleration is performed so that the feedrate specified for a block isattained when the block is executed.N2N1F1F2F3TimeProgrammed speedFeedrate obtained byacceleration/deceleration before interpolationFeedrateIf “1” is set to bit 7(BDO) and bit ...

  • Page 636

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02610Acceleration/deceleration is performed with the largest tangentacceleration/deceleration that does not exceed the acceleration set foreach axis.(Example)X–axis permissible acceleration: 1000 mm/sec2Y–axis permissible acceleration: 1200 mm/sec2Ac...

  • Page 637

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR611Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a blockis attained at the beginning of the block.Deceleration can be performed over several blocks.TimeDecelerationstart pointDecelerationstart pointSpeed control by bell–shaped acce...

  • Page 638

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02612(b) If A + B > Remaining amount of travel in the block beingexecuted when the single–block command is executedA stop state may continue over several blocks.The stop is made as described later.Time$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$"""&quo...

  • Page 639

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR613(b) If A > Remaining amount of travel in the block being executedwhen the single–block command is executedA stop state may continue over several blocks.The stop is made as described later.############################&&&&&&...

  • Page 640

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02614(3) Cutting load that is expected from the travel direction on the Z–axisSpecified tool pathTool path assumedwhen Al High PrecisionContour Control is usedThe machining error is decreasedbecause of the deceleration bydifference in feedrate.The machin...

  • Page 641

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR615(c) During descent on the Z–axis, the cutting load increases, andoverride is applied according to the Z–axis descent angle.N2N1N3tN1N2N3ZXSpecifiedfeedrate(Example)With look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, thetangent feedra...

  • Page 642

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02616ProgramN1 G01 G91 X100. F5000N2 Y100.N1N2Tangent feedrateX–axis feedrateY–axis feedrateThe decelerationbased on the feedratedifference is used.Tangent feedrateX–axis feedrateY–axis feedrateThe feedrate difference becomessmall, and the feedrate...

  • Page 643

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR617Deceleration to500 mm/minDeceleration to354 mm/min(Example)If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and thepermissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes)If “1” is set, the feedrate is determined not only with the condition that theper...

  • Page 644

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02618X–axisfeedrateN1N2YXN3N4N6N7N8TangentfeedrateN1N5N9N1N5N9N9N5Y–axisfeedrateFig. 22.1.2 (b) Example of Determining the Feedrate with the AccelerationThe method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differsdepending on the setting of pa...

  • Page 645

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR619If “1” is set, the feedrate is determined with not only the condition that thepermissible acceleration on each axis is not exceeded but also thecondition that the deceleration feedrate is constant regardless of the traveldirection if the shape is ...

  • Page 646

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02620Usually, the cutting resistance is higher when machining is performedwith the bottom of the cutter, as shown in Fig. 22.1.2 (c) an whenmachining is performed with the side of the cutter, as shown in Fig. 22.1.2(d). Deceleration is, therefore, require...

  • Page 647

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR621CAUTION1 The function for determining the feedrate with the cuttingfeed is effective only when the tool is parallel with theZ–axis. Thus, it may not be possible to apply this function,depending on the structure of the machine used.2 In the function...

  • Page 648

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02622When bit 3 (OVR) of parameter No. 8459 is 1, the following feedrates canbe overridden:– Feedrate decelerated by deceleration based on feedrate difference inlook–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation– Feedrate decelerated by decele...

  • Page 649

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR623S Mirror image (Do not change the state of the signal).S F1 digit feed (Feedrate can not be changed by using the manual pulsegenerator.)The AI high Precision Contour Control mode or the AI Nano highPrecision Contour Control mode is automatically cance...

  • Page 650

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02624S 3–dimensional tool compensation–G41S Wheel wear compensation–G41S Tool offset–G45,G46,G47,G48S Local coordinate system–G52S Machine coordinate system–G53S Single direction positioning–G60S Automatic corner override–G62S Tapping mode...

  • Page 651

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR625When the following function is used, a AI High Precision ContourControl and the AI Nano High Precision Contour Control cannot be used.S Angular axis controlS Arbitary angular axis controlThe limitation may be attached about the combination of the NCin...

  • Page 652

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02626NoteSpecificationsItemAxis controlAxis control by PMCThe axis which is used in the AI HighPrecision Contour Control mode or inthe AI nano High Precision ContourControl mode can not be used as thecontrol axis of the PMC Axis Control inthe AI High Prec...

  • Page 653

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR627NoteSpecificationsItemAxis controlStored stroke check 2The AI high precision contour controlmode or the AI nano high precisioncontour control mode is automaticallycanceled once and the buffering is in-hibited if G22 or G23 is used in the AIhigh Precis...

  • Page 654

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02628NoteSpecificationsItemInterpolation functionsLinear interpolationG01Circular interpolationG02,G03Helical interpolation(Circular interpolation) + (Linear inter-polation for up to 2 axes)Helical interpolation B(Circular interpolation) + (Linear inter-po...

  • Page 655

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR629NoteSpecificationsItemFeed functionsF1 digit feedUsing the manual pulse generator cannot change Feedrate.Inverse time feedG93External decelerationExternal decelerationLook ahead liner–type acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.Look ahead Be...

  • Page 656

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02630NoteSpecificationsItemProgram inputExternal memory and sub programcalling functionM198Subprogram callM98Circular interpolation by R program-mingScalingG50,G51The mode of AI high precision contourcontrol or of AI nano high precisioncontour control is p...

  • Page 657

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR631NoteSpecificationsItemMiscellaneous/spindle functions2nd. Auxiliary functionThe AI high precision contour controlmode or the AI nano high precisioncontour control mode is automaticallycanceled once and the buffering is in-hibited if this function is u...

  • Page 658

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02632NoteSpecificationsItemTool functions3–dimensional tool compensationG41.2,G42.2G41.3The command which automaticallycancel AI high precision contour con-trol mode or AI nano high precisioncontour control mode can not be used.However M,S,T and B comman...

  • Page 659

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR633The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls the toolcenter so that the tool axis always moves along a specified path on thecylindrical surface, towards the rotation axis (cylindrical axis) of theworkpiece. On the other hand, this fun...

  • Page 660

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02634G05 P10000 ;Sets AI High precision contour control mode. :G07.1 IPr ;Sets cylindrical interpolation mode. :..G41(G42)..Sets cutter compensation mode. :..G40..Clear cutter compensation mode. :G07.1 IP0 ;Clears cylindrical interpol...

  • Page 661

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR6351) Let C0 be the head of the vector normal to N1 from S0, which isthe tool center position at the start point of circular block N1. LetC1 be the head of the similar vector at the end point.2) As the tool moves from S0 to S1, a superimposed movement i...

  • Page 662

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02636Programmed pathTool center pathS2C2C2VS1C1N1N2N3: Cutting surface after the end of block N1Z–axisC–axis on the cylindrical surfaceY–axisV: C–axis component of C2 – C1C1 : Cutting surface of block N1C2Fig. 22.2 (d) When Bit 6 (CYS) of Parame...

  • Page 663

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR6373) When the amount of travel (L1) of block N2 is less than the valueset in parameter No. 6113, as shown in Fig. 22.2 (f), cutting pointcompensation is not applied between blocks N1 and N2. Instead,block N2 is executed with the cutting point compensat...

  • Page 664

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02638: Cutting surface of block N3V: Cutting point compensation between blocks N2 and N3C1 : Cutting surface of blocks N1 and N2C2C1C2VC1N1N2N3L1S2S1RZ–axisY–axisTool center pathProgrammed pathC–axis on the cylindrical surfaceFig. 22.2 (g) When the ...

  • Page 665

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR639VsFcVceVeVcsToolFz = Fz’Fc’Z–axisY–axisProgrammed pathC–axisTool center pathFig. 22.2 (h) Actual Speed Indication during Circular Interpolation(1) In any of the following G code modes, cylindrical interpolationcutting point compensation can...

  • Page 666

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02640ToolToolOvercut portionFig. 22.2 (i) OvercuttingSet the same minimum input increment for an offset axis and linear axiswhen cylindrical interpolation is performed.When specifying the radius of a workpiece, use the minimum inputincrement (with no deci...

  • Page 667

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR641Tool center pathC–axis on theCylindricalsurfaceTool20 3060 70(deg)3060708090120(mm)Tool(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)Programmed pathZ–axisZ–axisC–axis on the Cylindrical surfaceFig. 22.2 (j) Path of Sample Program for Cylindrical Interpolation CuttingPoint ...

  • Page 668

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02642NumberMessageContents0015TOO MANY AXES COMMANDEDA move command was specified for more axes than can becontrolled by simultaneous axis control.Either add on the simultaneous axis control extension op-tion, or divide the number of programmed move axes i...

  • Page 669

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR643On a five–axis machine having two rotation axes that turn a tool, toollength compensation can be performed momentarily even in the middleof a block.This tool length compensation is classified into one of two types basedon the programming method. In...

  • Page 670

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02644NOTEThe length from the tool tip to tool pivot point must equal thesum of the tool length compensation amount and tool holderoffset value.H: Offset numberG43.4 H_;I,J,K: Tool axis orientationH: Offset numberQ: Tool inclination angle (degrees)G43.5 I_ ...

  • Page 671

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR645When only the rotation axis position is specified in tool center pointcontrol (type 1) mode, and when only I, J, and K are specified in toolcenter point control (type 2) mode, the tool tip center position remainsunchanged before and after the specific...

  • Page 672

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02646Flat–end millProgrammed pathTool tip centerCorner–radius–end millProgrammed pathTool tip centerWhen linear interpolation (G01) is specified in tool center point controlmode, the feedrate is controlled so that the tool tip center moves at aspecif...

  • Page 673

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR647NOTE1 Set the following parameters:(1)Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No.1401 = 1: Linear–type rapidtraverse(2)Bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No.19501 = 1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used in rapid traverse(3) Parameter No.1620: Time cons...

  • Page 674

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02648IJcKJIbKJIKlZzKJIJlYyKJIIlXx1221222222222tantan−−=+=+++=+++=+++=zyx,,: Tool center positioncb,: Rotation axis positionZYX,,: tip position(programmed position)KJI,,: Tool axis directionl: Tool offset valueAll positions are represented by absoluteco...

  • Page 675

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR649(2) When the rotation axes are the B– and C–axes, and the tool axis is theZ–axisCBZYXCBWorkpieceb+ tan*1I2) J2Kc+ tan*1JI(3) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is theX–axisBAZYXABWorkpiecea+ tan*1J–Kb+ tan*1J...

  • Page 676

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02650(4) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is theZ–axis (master axis : B–axis)BAZYXWorkpieceBAa+ tan*1* JI2) K2b+ tan*1IK(5) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is theZ–axis (master ...

  • Page 677

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR651Tool center point control and three–dimensional cutter compensation canbe used at the same time.Three–dimensional cutter compensation is applied to a specified tool tippoint. Three–dimensional cutter compensation, however, is notperformed momen...

  • Page 678

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02652When the following functions are used in tool center point control mode,the same operation as tool length compensation in tool axis directionresults:– Specification of an axis not related to tool center point control– The following G functions of ...

  • Page 679

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR653S 3–dimensional tool compensation–G41S Wheel wear compensation–G41S Tool offset–G45,G46,G47,G48S Programmable mirror image–G50.1,G51.1S Local coordinate system–G52S Machine coordinate system–G53S Single direction positioning–G60S Autom...

  • Page 680

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02654In the mode for this function, the following functions cannot be used, Thealarm(P/S5196) is issued when the following functions are used. :– Manual interruption operation– Tool retract and recoverThe following functions can not be used in tool cen...

  • Page 681

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR655When a 5–axis machine that has two axes for rotating the tool is used, toollength compensation can be performed in a specified tool axis directionon a rotation axis. When a rotation axis is specified in tool lengthcompensation in tool axis directio...

  • Page 682

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02656The tool compensation vector changes as the offset value changes ormovement is made on a rotation axis. When the tool compensation vectorchanges, movement is made according to the change value along theX–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis.When the comman...

  • Page 683

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR657(2) B–axis and C–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axisCBZYXCBWorkpieceVx = Lc * sin(b) * cos(c)Vy = Lc * sin(b) * sin(c)Vz = Lc * cos(b)(3) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the X–axisBAZYXABWorkpieceVx = Lc * cos(b)Vy = Lc * sin(b...

  • Page 684

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02658(4) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis, and the B–axisused as the masterBAZYXWorkpieceBAVx = Lc * cos(a) * sin(b)Vy = –Lc * sin(a)Vz = Lc * cos(a) * cos(b)(5) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis, and th...

  • Page 685

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR659The machine–specific length from the rotation center of the tool rotationaxes (A– and B–axes, A– and C–axes, and B– and C–axes) to the toolmounting position is referred to as the tool holder offset. Unlike a toollength offset value, a t...

  • Page 686

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02660Xp = Lc * sin(B–(Bz+Bo)) * cos(C–(Cz+Co))Yp = Lc * sin(B–(Bz+Bo)) * sin(C–(Cz+Co))Zp = Lc * cos(B–(Bz+Bo))Bz,Cz : B–axis and C–axis origin compensation valuesBo,Co : B–axis and C–axis rotation axis offset valuesNormally, the control ...

  • Page 687

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR661According to the machine type, set the values listed in the following table:Table 22.4 (a) Setting the Tool Holder Offset and Rotation CenterCompensation VectorMachine typeTool holder offsetParameter No. 19666Rotation center compensation vectorParame...

  • Page 688

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02662Tool tip(programmed point)Tool length compensation amountSecond rotation axiscenter (control point)Rotation center compensationvector parameter (No. 19661)First rotation axis centerTool holder offsetparameter (No. 19666)Tool mounting positionSpindle c...

  • Page 689

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR663ShiftvectorOrdinary tool lengthcompensation (G43)Tool length compensation in tool axisdirection(G43.1) :When tool is not tiltedControlpointControl pointbefore shiftControl pointTool length compensation in tool axisdirection (G43.1) :When tool is tilt...

  • Page 690

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02664Suppose the above. Then, the tool length compensation vector for eachaxis is calculated depending on the machine type, as follows:(1) A– and C–axes. The tool axis is the Z–axis.VxVyVz+cos Csin C0* sin Ccos C00011000cos Asin A0* sin Acos ACxCyT...

  • Page 691

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR665– Mirror imageThe condition of DI signal cannot be changed.– Tool life management functionThe tool length compensation use the amount of the tool specified bytool life management function. The command for the tool lifemanagement function have to c...

  • Page 692

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02666– Figure copy –G72.1,G72.2– Canned cycles–G73–G79,G80,G81–G89,G98,G99– Electric gear box–G80,G81– Function for hobbing machine–G80,G81– External motion function–G81– Chopping–G81.1– Small–hole peck drilling cycle–G83...

  • Page 693

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR667– External decelerationExternal decelaration is not available in this mode.tool axis direction tool length compensation function cannot be used withthe following function.– Angular axis control– Arbitrary angular axis contolThe limitation attach...

  • Page 694

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02668The 3–dimensional cutter compensation function is used with machinesthat can control the direction of tool axis movement by using rotation axes(such as the B– and C–axes). This function performs cutter compensationby calculating a tool vector f...

  • Page 695

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR669(1) Type AType A operation is similar to cutter compensation as shown below.ToolG41.2G40:Tool center path:Programmed tool pathOperation in linear interpolation:Tool center path:Programmed tool pathToolG42.2G40Operation in circular interpolationFig. 22...

  • Page 696

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02670:Tool center path:Programmed tool pathToolG42.2G40Operation in circular interpolationFig. 22.5.1 (c) Operation at compensation start–up and cancellation (Type B)(3) Type CAs shown in the following figures, when G41.2, G42.2, or G40 isspecified, a b...

  • Page 697

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR671NOTEFor type C operation, the following conditions must be satisfiedwhen tool side compensation is started up or canceled :1 The block containing G40, G41.2, or G42.2 must beexecuted in the G00 or G01 mode.2 The block containing G40, G41.2, or G42.2 m...

  • Page 698

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02672:Tool center path:Programmed tool pathExample(1)–3Example(1)–4Actual toolReference toolActual toolReference toolWorkpieceWorkpiece:Tool offset valueFig. 22.5.1 (f) Operation in the compensation mode (1)–3, 4(2) When the tool moves at a corner, ...

  • Page 699

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR673:Tool center path:Programmed tool pathExample(3)–1Tool movement whenchanging G41.2 to G42.2(G41.2 mode)G91 G01 X100.0G42.2 X–100.0Example(3)–2Tool movement when theG code is left unchanged (G41.2 mode)G91 G01 X100.0X–100.0Fig. 22.5.1 (h) Oper...

  • Page 700

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02674YZXPRe2e1=VTVDQe3Fig. 22.5.1 (j) Compensation vector calculationIn above figure, cutter compensation vector VD at point Q is calculatedas follows :(1) Calculating the tool vector (VT)(2) Calculating the coordinate conversion matrix (M)Coordinate syst...

  • Page 701

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR675(3) Converting coordinates from coordinate system C1 to coordinatesystem C2The coordinates of the start and end points P and Q of a block andcoordinates of the end point R of the next block in coordinate systemC1 are converted to coordinates P’, Q...

  • Page 702

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02676(1) When a rotation axis and linear axis are specified at the same timeWhen a rotation axis and linear axis are specified in the same blockin the G41.2 or G42.2 mode (the compensation plane changesfrequently), the cutter compensation vector is calcula...

  • Page 703

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR677Vector calculation at the end point (Q) of block N2– The tool vector (VT) and coordinate conversion matrix (MN2) arecalculated using the coordinates (B = 0, C = 0) of the rotation axis atpoint Q.– The cutter compensation vector (VN2) is calculated...

  • Page 704

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02678XYZN3N4N6N5N7N8N10N9Fig. 22.5.1 (n) Conceptual DiagramYZVaVb46°45°Va: Tool direction vector when A = –46Vb: Tool direction vector when A=45A : End point of N3B : End point of N4C : End point of N6ABCFig. 22.5.1 (o) Tool Direction Vectore3e2A’V...

  • Page 705

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR679The move direction of A’B’ is opposite to that of B’C’, so that twocompensation vectors, V1 and V2, are produced at point B’ (end point ofN4). There is a possibility of overcutting in this case, so an alarm(PS0272) is issued from N4.(1) Con...

  • Page 706

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02680A’ : Point A projected onto the compensation planeB’ : Point B projected onto the compensation planeC’ : Point C projected onto the compensation planeRa : Vector A’B’Rb : Vector B’C’e3e2A’C’B’RaRbFig. 22.5.1 (r) Programmed Path (o...

  • Page 707

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR681At point B’, a vector (V) perpendicular to A’B’ is generated.e3e2A’C’B’VFig. 22.5.1 (s) Q1 CommandA vertical vector can also be generated by specifying G41.2 orG42.1 in the next block as indicated in the example below.Example) N6 G41.2 Y...

  • Page 708

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02682Leading edge offset is a type of cutter compensation that is used when aworkpiece is machined with the edge of a tool. A tool is automaticallyshifted by a specified cutter compensation value on the line where a planeformed by a tool direction vector ...

  • Page 709

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR683(1) When the tool vector is inclined in the direction the tool movesToolTool vector(VT)VMG41.3(VC)G40 : Tool center path : Programmed tool pathFig. 22.5.2 (b) When the tool vector is inclined in the direction the toolmoves(2) When the tool vector is ...

  • Page 710

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02684Programmed pathVC1There is one block thatspecifies no movement.Tool center path(after compensation)VT1VT2VM1VM2VM4VC2 = VC3Fig. 22.5.2 (e) There is one block that specifies no movement.If block 3 involves no movement, the compensation vector of block...

  • Page 711

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR685VCnqqDirection of VCnq represents the included anglebetween VMn+1 and VTn.(0° v q v 180°)VCnVTnVTnVMn+1VMn+1(VMn+1 VTn) VTnFig. 22.5.2 (g) Direction of the compensation vector (1)(b) (VMn+1,VTn) < 0 (90deg < q < 180deg.)qqVCnDirection...

  • Page 712

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02686When the included angle q between VMn+1 and VTn is regarded as 0deg.,180deg., or 90deg., the compensation vector is created in a different way.So, when creating an NC program, note the following points :(1) Setting a variation range for regarding q as...

  • Page 713

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR687next block must not point in the same direction or in oppositedirections at start–up.The previously created compensation vector is maintained other thanat start–up at all times.If the included angles between VT2 and VM3, VT3 andVM4, and VT4and VM4...

  • Page 714

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02688VM6VM5VM4VM3VM2VM1VC5VC1VT2VT1Programmed PathTool center path(after compensation)VT5VT4VT3VC4VC3VC2Fig. 22.5.2 (o) When q=90deg. Is Determined (2)G41.2, G42.2, G41.3, and G40 are continuous–state G codes that belongto the same group. Therefore, th...

  • Page 715

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR689– One–digit F code feedThe feedrate cannot be changed by using manual pulse generator.In the mode for this function, the following commands cannot be used.The alarm is issued when the following commands are orderd. :– Custom macro B– Exponenti...

  • Page 716

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02690– Small–hole peck drilling cycle–G83– Changing workpiece coordinate system–G92– workpiece coordinate system preset –G92.1– Feed per revolution–G95– Constant surface speed control–G96,G97– Infeed control–G160,G161– NURBS int...

  • Page 717

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR691NumberMessageContents0037CRC:PLANE CHANGEAn attempt was made to change theplane in the cutter compensation mode.To change the plane, cancel the cuttercompensation mode.0041CRC:INTERFERENCEThe depth of the cut is too great duringcutter compensation. Ch...

  • Page 718

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02692NumberContentsMessage5408G41.3 ILLEGALSTART_UP(1) The G41.3 G code (startup) wasspecified in a group 01 mode for oth-er than G00 and G01.(2) The angle formed by the tool direc-tion vector and the movement direc-tion vector was 0° or 180° degreesat s...

  • Page 719

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR693Specifying an intermediate and end point on an arc enables circularinterpolation in a 3–dimensional space.The command format is as follows:G02.4XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ; First block (mid–point of the arc)XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ; Second block (end...

  • Page 720

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02694XYZStart pointMid–point(X1,Y1,Z1)End point(X2,Y2,Z2)Fig.22.6 Start, Mid, and End PointsIf the modal code is changed by specifying a code such as G01 with theend point not specified, the arc cannot be obtained, and alarm PS5432 isissued. During MDI...

  • Page 721

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR695D If the start point, mid–point, and end–point are on the same line, linearinterpolation is performed.D If the start point coincides with the mid–point, the mid–pointcoincides with the end point, or the end point coincides with the startpoint,...

  • Page 722

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02696In the mode for this function, the following commands cannot be used.The alarm is issued when the following commands are orderd. :– Custom macro B– Exponentioal interpolation–G02.3,G03.3– Dwell–G04– Function concerning high–speed –G05 ...

  • Page 723

    PROGRAMMINGB–63534EN/0222. RISC PROCESSOR697– workpiece coordinate system preset –G92.1– Feed per revolution–G95– Constant surface speed control–G96,G97– Infeed control–G160,G161– NURBS interpolation–G06.2– Workpiece coordinate system–G54,G54.1,G55,G56,G57,G58,G59– Thr...

  • Page 724

    PROGRAMMING22. RISC PROCESSORB–63534EN/02698– Macro executor ( Execution macro )– Manual handle interruption operation– External decelerationExternal decelaration is not available in this mode.– Arbitrary chanfering/Corner rounding3 dimensional cutter compensation function cannot be us...

  • Page 725

    III. OPERATION

  • Page 726

  • Page 727

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/021. GENERAL7011 GENERAL

  • Page 728

    OPERATION1. GENERALB–63534EN/02702The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machineposition.This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replacedor the coordinate are set. Ordinarily, after the power is turned on, the toolis moved to the reference position....

  • Page 729

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/021. GENERAL703Using machine operator’s panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manualhandle, the tool can be moved along each axis.ToolWorkpieceMachine operator’s panelManualpulse generatorFig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by manual operationThe tool can be moved in the follow...

  • Page 730

    OPERATION1. GENERALB–63534EN/02704Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the createdprogram. It includes memory, MDI and DNC operations. (See SectionIII–4).ProgramTool01000;M_S_T;G92_X_ ;G00...;G01...... ;....Fig. 1.2 (a) Tool Movement by ProgrammingAfter the program is ...

  • Page 731

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/021. GENERAL705Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program isprepared for one workpiece. If two or more programs are in memory,select the program to be used, by searching the program number (SectionIII–9.3).G92O1001Program numberM30G92O1002G92M30Pro...

  • Page 732

    OPERATION1. GENERALB–63534EN/02706While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlapautomatic operation by rotating the manual handle. (See Section III–4.8)ZXProgrammeddepth of cutDepth of cut by handle interruptionTool position afterhandle interruptionTool position durin...

  • Page 733

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/021. GENERAL707Before machining is started, the automatic running check can beexecuted. It checks whether the created program can operate the machineas desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machineactually or viewing the position display change (without run...

  • Page 734

    OPERATION1. GENERALB–63534EN/02708When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes oneoperation then stops. By pressing the cycle start again, the tool executesthe next operation then stops. The program is checked in this manner.(See Section III–5.5)Cycle startCycle startCycle ...

  • Page 735

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/021. GENERAL709After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be correctedor modified from the MDI panel (See Section III–9).This operation can be executed using the part program storage/editfunction.Program registrationMDI CNC CNCProgram correction or modifi...

  • Page 736

    OPERATION1. GENERALB–63534EN/02710The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internalmemory by key operation on the MDI screen (See III–11).Data settingMDIData displayScreen KeysCNC memoryFig. 1.6 (a) Displaying and Setting DataTool compensationnumber1 12.3 25.0Tool co...

  • Page 737

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/021. GENERAL711Machinedshape1st tool path2nd tool pathOffset value of the 1st toolOffset value of the 2nd toolFig. 1.6 (c) Offset ValueApart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator inoperation. This data causes machine characteristics to change.For exampl...

  • Page 738

    OPERATION1. GENERALB–63534EN/02712The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action incharacteristics of various machines.For example, CNC can specify the following:S Rapid traverse rate of each axisS Whether increment system is based on metric system or inch system.S How to set comman...

  • Page 739

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/021. GENERAL713The contents of the currently active program are displayed. In addition,the programs scheduled next and the program list are displayed.(See Section III–11.2.1)PROGRAMMEM STOP * * * * * *13 : 18 : 14O1100 N00005>_PRGRMN1 G90 G17 G00 G41 D07 X250.0 Y550.0 ;...

  • Page 740

    OPERATION1. GENERALB–63534EN/02714The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values.The distance from the current position to the target position can also bedisplayed. (See Section III–11.1.1 to 11.1.3)YXxyWorkpiece coordinate system ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)* * * * * ...

  • Page 741

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/021. GENERAL715When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of partsare displayed on the screen. (See Section lll–11.4.5)ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)* * * *O0003 N00003(OPRT)X 150.000Y 300.000Z 100.000MEM STRT20 : 22 : 23RUN TIME0H16M CYCLE TIME 0H 1M 0S...

  • Page 742

    OPERATION1. GENERALB–63534EN/02716Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory can beoutput to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for saving. After onceoutput to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory.MemoryProgramOffsetParametersReader/puncherinterfacePortable t...

  • Page 743

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES7172 OPERATIONAL DEVICESThe available operational devices include the setting and display unitattached to the CNC, the machine operator’s panel, and externalinput/output devices such as a, Handy File and etc.

  • Page 744

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02718The setting and display units are shown in Subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.5 ofPart III.7.2”/8.4” LCD–Mounted type CNC Control UnitIII–2.1.1. . . . . . . 9.5”/10.4” LCD–Mounted type CNC Control UnitIII–2.1.2. . . . . . Stand–Alone Type Sm...

  • Page 745

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES7192.1.17.2″/8.4″ LCD–MountedType CNC Control Unit2.1.29.5″/10.4″ LCD–MountedType CNC Control Unit

  • Page 746

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02720Function keysAddress/numeric keysShift keyCancel (CAN) keyInput keyEdit keysHelp keyReset keyCursor keysPage change keys2.1.3Stand–Alone TypeSmall MDI Unit

  • Page 747

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES721Shift keyPage change keysCursor keysFunction keysInput keyCancel (CAN) keyEdit keysAddress/numeric keysReset keyHelp key2.1.4Stand–Alone TypeStandard MDI Unit

  • Page 748

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02722Page change keysHelp keyReset keyAddress/numeric keysCursor keysShift keyFunction keysEdit keysCancel (CAN) keyInput key2.1.5Stand–Alone Type 61Full Key MDI Unit

  • Page 749

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES723Table 2.2 Explanation of the MDI keyboardNumberNameExplanation1RESET keyPress this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.2HELP keyPress this button to use the help function when uncertain about the operation ofan MDI key (help function).In ...

  • Page 750

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02724Table 2.2 Explanation of the MDI keyboardNumberExplanationName10Cursor move keysThere are four different cursor move keys. :This key is used to move the cursor to the right or in the forwarddirection. The cursor is moved in short units in the forw...

  • Page 751

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES725The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to bedisplayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressedimmediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to theselected function can be selected.1Pre...

  • Page 752

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02726Function keys are provided to select the type of screen to be displayed.The following function keys are provided on the MDI panel:Press this key to display the position screen.Press this key to display the program screen.Press this key to display th...

  • Page 753

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES727To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a softkey. Soft keys are also used for actual operations.The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressingeach function key.: Indicates a screen that can be d...

  • Page 754

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02728Monitor screen[(OPRT)][PTSPRE][EXEC][RUNPRE][EXEC][ABS]Absolute coordinate displayPOS[(OPRT)][REL](Axis or numeral)[ORIGIN][PRESET][ALLEXE](Axis name)[EXEC][PTSPRE][EXEC][RUNPRE][EXEC][ALL][HNDL][MONI]Soft key transition triggered by the function ke...

  • Page 755

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES729[ABS][(OPRT)][BG–EDT][O SRH][PRGRM]Program display screenPROGSoft key transition triggered by the function keyin the MEM modePROG[N SRH][REWIND]See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”[(OPRT)][CHECK]Program check display screen[REL]Curren...

  • Page 756

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02730[FL.SDL][PRGRM]File directory display screen[(OPRT)][DIR][SELECT][EXEC](number)[F SET]Schedule operation display screen[(OPRT)][SCHDUL][CLEAR](Schedule data)[CAN][EXEC][INPUT]Return to(1) (Program display)(2)2/2

  • Page 757

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES7311/2[(OPRT)][BG–EDT](O number)[O SRH][PRGRM]Program displayPROG(Address)[SRH↓][REWIND](Address)[SRH↑][F SRH][CAN](N number)[EXEC][READ][CHAIN][STOP][CAN][EXEC][PUNCH][STOP][CAN][EXEC][DELETE][CAN][EXEC][EX–EDT][COPY][CRSR∼][∼CRSR][∼BTTM...

  • Page 758

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02732(1)[C.A.P.]Graphic Conversational Programming[PRGRM][G.MENU](G number)[BLOCK](Data)[INPUT]INSERTWhen a G number is omitted, the standard screen appears.[(OPRT)][INPUT]2/2Return to the program[(OPRT)][BG–EDT](O number)[O SRH][LIB]Program directory ...

  • Page 759

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES733[(OPRT)][BG–EDT][PRGRM]Program displayPROGSoft key transition triggered by the function keyin the MDI modePROGPROGRAM SCREEN[(OPRT)][BG–EDT][MDI]Program input screen(Address)(Address)[SRH↓][SRH↑]Current block display screen[(OPRT)][BG–EDT]...

  • Page 760

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02734[(OPRT)][BG–EDT][PRGRM]Program displayPROGSoft key transition triggered by the function keyin the HNDL, JOG, or REF modePROGPROGRAM SCREENCurrent block display screen[(OPRT)][BG–EDT][CURRNT]Next block display screen[(OPRT)][BG–EDT][NEXT]Progra...

  • Page 761

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES7351/2[(OPRT)][BG–END](O number)[O SRH][PRGRM]Program displayPROG(Address)[SRH↓][REWIND](Address)[SRH↑][F SRH][CAN](N number)[EXEC][READ][CHAIN][STOP][CAN][EXEC][PUNCH][STOP][CAN][EXEC][DELETE][CAN][EXEC][EX–EDT][COPY][CRSR∼][∼CRSR][∼BTTM...

  • Page 762

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02736[(OPRT)][BG–EDT](O number)[O SRH][LIB]Program directory display[READ][CHAIN][STOP][CAN][EXEC][PUNCH][STOP][CAN][EXEC](1)(O number)(O number)[C.A.P.]Graphic Conversational Programming[PRGRM][G.MENU](G number)[BLOCK](Data)When a G number is omitted,...

  • Page 763

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES737[(OPRT)][OFFSET]Tool offset screenSoft key transition triggered by the function keyOFFSETSETTING(Number)(Axis name)(Numeral)(Numeral)[NO SRH][INP.C.][+INPUT][INPUT][(OPRT)][SETING]Setting screen(Numeral)(Numeral)[NO SRH][+INPUT][INPUT][ON:1][OFF:0][...

  • Page 764

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02738[(OPRT)][MENU]Pattern data input screen[SELECT](Number)[OPR]Software operator’s panel screen[(OPRT)][TOOLLF]Tool life management setting screen(Numeral)[NO SRH][INPUT](Number)[CAN][EXEC][CLEAR]2/2(1)[MODEM]Modem card screen[MD.MON][MD.SET][F–ACT...

  • Page 765

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES739Soft key transition triggered by the function key[(OPRT)][PARAM]Parameter screen(Numeral)(Numeral)[NO SRH][+INPUT][INPUT][ON:1][OFF:0](Number)SYSTEMSYSTEM[READ][CAN][EXEC][PUNCH][CAN][EXEC][(OPRT)][DGNOS]Diagnosis screen[NO SRH](Number)[PMC]PMC scre...

  • Page 766

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02740[W.DGNS]Waveform diagnosis screen(4)[W.PRM][W.GRPH][STSRT][TIME→][←TIME][H–DOBL][H–HALF][STSRT][CH–1↑][V–DOBL][V–HALF][CH–1↓][STSRT][CH–2↑][V–DOBL][V–HALF][CH–2↓]2/2[(OPRT)][SV.PRM]Servo parameter screen[ON:1][OFF:0][...

  • Page 767

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES741Soft key transition triggered by the function key[ALARM]Alarm display screenMESSAGEMESSAGE[MSG]Message display screen[HISTRY]Alarm history screen[(OPRT)][CLEAR]MESSAGE SCREEN[ALAM]Soft key transition triggered by the function keyAlarm detail screenH...

  • Page 768

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02742Soft key transition triggered by the function key[(OPRT)][PARAM]Solid graphicsGRAPHGRAPH[BLANK][ANEW][(OPRT)][3–PLN][ ][←][→][↑][↓][(OPRT)][EXEC][A.ST][F.ST][STOP][REWIND][+ROT][–ROT][+TILT][–TILT][(OPRT)][REVIEW][ANEW][+ROT][–RO...

  • Page 769

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES743When an address and a numerical key are pressed, the charactercorresponding to that key is input once into the key input buffer. Thecontents of the key input buffer is displayed at the bottom of the CRTscreen. In order to indicate that it is key ...

  • Page 770

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02744After a character or number has been input from the MDI panel, a datacheck is executed when INPUTkey or a soft key is pressed. In the case ofincorrect input data or the wrong operation a flashing warning messagewill be displayed on the status displ...

  • Page 771

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES745There are 12 soft keys in the 10.4″LCD/MDI or 9.5″LCD/MDI. Asillustrated below, the 5 soft keys on the right and those on the right andleft edges operate in the same way as the 7.2″LCD or 8.4″ LCD, whereasthe 5 keys on the left hand side ar...

  • Page 772

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02746External input/output devices such as FANUC Handy File and so forth areavailable. For details on the devices, refer to the manuals listed below.Table 2.4 (a) External I/O deviceDevice nameUsageMax.storagecapacityReferencemanualFANUC Handy FileEasy...

  • Page 773

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES747Before an external input/output device can be used, parameters must beset as follows.CNCMAIN CPU BOARDOPTION–1 BOARDChannel 1Channel 2Channel 3JD5AJD5BRS–422RS–232–CRS–232–CJD5CJD6ARS–232–CReader/puncherHost computerHost computerRead...

  • Page 774

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/027480020I/O CHANNELSpecify a channel for an input/output device.I/O CHANNEL = 0 : Channel 1 = 1 : Channel 1 = 2 : Channel 2 = 3 : Channel 3I/O CHANNEL=0(channel 1)0101Stop bit and other data0102Number specified forthe input/output device0103Baud rateI/O...

  • Page 775

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES749Procedure of turning on the power1Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.)2Turn on the power according to the manual issued by the machinetool builder.3After the po...

  • Page 776

    OPERATION2. OPERATIONAL DEVICESB–63534EN/02750If a hardware failure or installation error occurs, the system displays oneof the following three types of screens then stops.Information such as the type of printed circuit board installed in each slotis indicated. This information and the LED sta...

  • Page 777

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/022. OPERATIONAL DEVICES751B0H1 – 01SLOT 01 (3046) : ENDSLOT 02 (3050) :Blank: Setting not completedModule IDSlot numberEND: Setting completedB0H1 – 01CNC control softwareSERVO : 90B0–01SUB : xxxx–xxOMM : yyyy–yyPMC : zzzz–zzDigital servo ROMSub CPU (remo...

  • Page 778

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/027523 MANUAL OPERATIONMANUAL OPERATION are six kinds as follows :3.1 Manual reference position return3.2 Jog feed3.3 Incremental feed3.4 Manual handle feed3.5 Manual absolute on and off3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed/Tool axis direction handle feed B3....

  • Page 779

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION753The tool is returned to the reference position as follows :The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No.1006) for each axis with the reference position return switch on themachine operator’s panel. The tool moves to the ...

  • Page 780

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02754Bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 is used for automatically setting thecoordinate system. When ZPR is set, the coordinate system isautomatically determined when manual reference position return isperformed. When a, b and g are set in parameter 1250, ...

  • Page 781

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION755In the jog mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on themachine operator’s panel continuously moves the tool along the selectedaxis in the selected direction.The jog feedrate is specified in a parameter (No.1423)The jog feedrate ca...

  • Page 782

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02756Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in programmedcommand.Changing the mode to the jog mode while pressing a feed axis anddirection selection switch does not enable jog ...

  • Page 783

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION757In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and directionselection switch on the machine operator’s panel moves the tool one stepalong the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distancethe tool is moved is the least input incr...

  • Page 784

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02758In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating themanual pulse generator on the machine operator’s panel. Select the axisalong which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selectionswitches.The minimum distance the tool is...

  • Page 785

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION759Parameter JHD (bit 0 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handlefeed in the JOG mode.When the parameter JHD( bit 0 of No. 7100) is set 1,both manual handlefeed and incremental feed are enabled.Parameter THD (bit 1 of No. 7100) enables or disable...

  • Page 786

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02760Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected, one for each axis.The three manual pulse generators can be simultaneously operated.WARNINGRotating the handle quickly with a large magnification suchas x100 moves the tool too fast. The feedrate is...

  • Page 787

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION761Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added tothe coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch onor off on the machine operator’s panel. When the switch is turned on, thedistance the tool is moved by manu...

  • Page 788

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02762The following describes the relation between manual operation andcoordinates when the manual absolute switch is turned on or off, using aprogram example.G01G90X200.0Y150.0X100.0Y100.0F010X300.0Y200.0;;;The subsequent figures use the following notation:...

  • Page 789

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION763Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block is beingexecuted, manual operation (Y–axis +75.0) is performed, the control unitis reset with the RESET button, and block is read again(300.0 , 275.0)(200.0,150.0)(300.0 , 200.0)(150.0 , 20...

  • Page 790

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02764When the switch is ON during cutter compensationOperation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manualintervention with the switch is ON during execution with an absolutecommand program in the cutter compensation mode will be describe...

  • Page 791

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION765Manual operation during corneringThis is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering.VA2’, VB1’, and VB2’ are vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculatedfr...

  • Page 792

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02766Tool axis direction handle feed moves the tool over a specified distanceby handle feed in the direction of the tool axis tilted by the rotation of therotary axis.Tool axis direction handle feed B has the function of tool axis directionhandle feed, and ...

  • Page 793

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION767Assume that the rotary axes for basic axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C,respectively. Assume also that the Z–axis represents the tool axis.Depending on the axis configuration of the machine, four types of toolaxis directions are available. Specify t...

  • Page 794

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02768(2) B–C axis typeXp = Hp sin (b) cos (c)Yp = Hp sin (b) sin (c)Zp = Hp cos (b)ZXYZpHpYpHpxyXp(3) A–B axis (A axis master) typeXp = Hp sin (b)Yp = –Hp cos (b) sin (a)Zp = Hp cos (b) cos (a)ZYXpXZpYp(4)A–B axis (B axis master) typeXp = Hp cos (a)...

  • Page 795

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION769In the figures above, a, b, and c represent the positions (angles) of theA–axis, B–axis, and C–axis from the machine zero point; those valuespresent when the tool axis direction handle feed mode is set or a resetoccurs are used. To change the fe...

  • Page 796

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02770Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed1Select the HANDLE switch from the mode selection switches.2Select the tool axis normal direction handle feed switch.3 Select the tool axis direction handle feed mode axis as the handle feedaxis for the first manual pulse...

  • Page 797

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION771The figure below shows handle pulse (Hp) distribution to the X–axis,Y–axis, and Z–axis for each of the four directions.(1) A–C axis type (X–axis direction)Xp = Hp COS (C)Yp = Hp SIN (C)Zp = 00CYYpXXp0’CX’CHp(X direction)The XY plane is dr...

  • Page 798

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02772(3) B–C axis type (X–axis direction)Xp = Hp COS (B) COS (C)Yp = Hp COS (B) SIN (C)Zp = –Hp SIN (B)(4) B–C axis type (Y–axis direction)Xp = –Hp SIN (C)Yp = Hp COS (C)Zp = 0Z00’ZpBCYHpxyYpX’CXXpHp(X direction)0CYYpXXp0’Y’CHp(Y directi...

  • Page 799

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION773Basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No. 1022 (planeselection). Rotary axes A, B, and C are determined by parameter No.1020 (axis name).The direction of the tool X axis is determined by setting bit 0 (TLX) ofparameter No. 7104.This funct...

  • Page 800

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02774In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operationsare enabled in addition to the conventional feed operation along aspecified single axis (X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, and so forth) based onsimultaneous 1–axis control:D Feed ...

  • Page 801

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION775For jog feedThe feedrate can be overridden using the manual feedrate overridedial.The procedure above is just an example. For actual operations, referto the relevant manual provided by the machine tool builder.For feed along an axis, no straight line/...

  • Page 802

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02776(2) Linear feed (simultaneous 2–axis control)By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved along the straightline parallel to a specified straight line on a simultaneous 2–axiscontrol basis. This manual handle is referred to as the guidance ha...

  • Page 803

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION777The feedrate depends on the speed at which a manual handle is turned.A distance to be traveled by the tool (along a tangent in the case of linearor circular feed) when a manual handle is turned by one pulse can beselected using the manual handle feed t...

  • Page 804

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02778Even in JOG mode, manual handle feed can be enabled using bit 0 (JHD)of parameter No. 7100. In this case, however, manual handle feed isenabled only when the tool is not moved along any axis by jog feed.Never use the mirror image function when perform...

  • Page 805

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION779For execution of rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle modeand move the tapping axis with a manual handle. For more informationabout rigid tapping, see Section II–13.2 and refer to the relevant manualprovided by the machine tool build...

  • Page 806

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02780Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No.5203 to 1.To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as same the normal rigid tapping.When the reset key is pressed, rigid mode is canceled, but the canned cycleis not canceled.When the rigi...

  • Page 807

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION781The manual numeric command function allows data programmedthrough the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system isready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. Thefollowing eight functions are supported:(1) Positioning (G00)...

  • Page 808

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02782Example 2: When the maximum number of controlled axes is 7 or 8PRGRMPROGRAM (JOG)O0010 N00020JOG* * * * * * * * * *00 : 00 : 00G00 P(ABSOLUTE)(DISTANCE TO GO)XX0.000X0.000YY0.000Y0.000ZZ0.000Z0.000UU0.000U0.000VV0.000V0.000WW0.000W0.000AA0.00...

  • Page 809

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION783NOTEWhen an alarm state exists, data cannot be set.5Press the cycle start switch on the machine operator’s panel to startcommand execution. The status is indicated as ”MSTR.” (When the9” screen is being used, the actual feedrate ”ACT.F” a...

  • Page 810

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02784NOTEWhen the manual rapid traverse selection switch is set tothe OFF position, the jog feedrate for each axis is clampedsuch that a parameter–set feedrate, determined by bit 1(LRP) of parameter No. 1401 as shown below, is notexceeded.LRP = 0: Manual ...

  • Page 811

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION785The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position withoutpassing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specifiedamount of travel. To select a reference position, specify P2, P3, or P4 inaddress P. If address P is omitt...

  • Page 812

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02786After address B, specify a numeric value of no more than the number ofdigits specified by parameter No. 3033.NOTE1 B codes can be renamed ”U,” ”V,” ”W,” ”A,” or ”C” by settingparameter No. 3460. If the new name is the same as an ax...

  • Page 813

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/023. MANUAL OPERATION787(1) When soft key [CLEAR] is pressed, followed by soft key [EXEC], allthe set data is cleared. In this case, however, the G codes are set to G00or G01, depending on the setting of bit 0 (G01) of parameter No. 3402.Data can also be cleared by pressing ...

  • Page 814

    OPERATION3. MANUAL OPERATIONB–63534EN/02788The manual numeric command screen appears even when the mode ischanged to REF mode. If, however, an attempt is made to set and executedata, a ”WRONG MODE” warning is output and the attempt fails.Commands cannot be specified for an axis along which...

  • Page 815

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION7894 AUTOMATIC OPERATIONProgrammed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automaticoperation.This chapter explains the following types of automatic operation:• MEMORY OPERATIONOperation by executing a program registered in CNC memory• MD...

  • Page 816

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02790Programs are registered in memory in advance. When one of theseprograms is selected and the cycle start switch on the machine operator’spanel is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED goeson.When the feed hold switch on the ...

  • Page 817

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION791b. Terminating memory operationPress the RESET key on the MDI panel. Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered. When a reset is applied during movement, movement deceleratesthen stops.After memory operation is started, the fo...

  • Page 818

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02792When the optional block skip switch on the machine operator’s panel isturned on, blocks containing a slash (/) are ignored.For the two–path control, a cycle start switch is provided for each toolpost. This allows the operator to activate a singl...

  • Page 819

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION793In the MDI mode, a program consisting of up to 10 lines can be createdin the same format as normal programs and executed from the MDI panel.MDI operation is used for simple test operations.The following procedure is given as an example. For actual ...

  • Page 820

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/027945To execute a program, set the cursor on the head of the program. (Startfrom an intermediate point is possible.) Push Cycle Start button onthe operator’s panel. By this action, the prepared program will start.(For the two–path control, sele...

  • Page 821

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION795The previous explanation of how to execute and stop memory operationalso applies to MDI operation, except that in MDI operation, M30 doesnot return control to the beginning of the program (M99 performs thisfunction).Programs prepared in the MDI mode...

  • Page 822

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02796When the custom macro option is provided, macro programs can also becreated, called, and executed in the MDI mode. However, macro callcommands cannot be executed when the mode is changed to MDI modeafter memory operation is stopped during execution ...

  • Page 823

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION797By activating automatic operation during the DNC operation mode(RMT), it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while aprogram is being read in via reader/puncher interface, or remote buffer.If the floppy cassette directory display option ...

  • Page 824

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02798PROGRAMO0001 N00020N020 X100.0 Z100.0 (DNC–PROG) ;N030X200.0Z200.0 ;N040X300.0 Z300.0 ;N050X400.0 Z400.0 ;N060 X500.0 Z500.0 ;N070 X600.0 Z600.0 ;N080 X700.0 Z400.0 ;N090 X800.0 Z400.0 ;N100 x900.0 z400.0 ;N110 x1000.0 z1000.0 ;N120 x800.0 z800.0 ...

  • Page 825

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION799In program display, no more than 256 characters can be displayed.Accordingly, character display may be truncated in the middle of a block.In DNC operation, M198 cannot be executed. If M198 is executed, P/Salarm No. 210 is issued.In DNC operation, c...

  • Page 826

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02800While an automation operation is being performed, a program input froman I/O device connected to the reader/punch interface can be executed andoutput through the reader/punch interface at the same time.Simultaneous Input/Output1Search for the progr...

  • Page 827

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION801M198 cannot be executed in the input, output and run simultaneous mode.An attempt to do so results in alarm No. 210.A macro control command cannot be executed in the input, output and runsimultaneous mode. An attempt to do so results in P/S alarm N...

  • Page 828

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02802This function specifies Sequence No. of a block to be restarted when a toolis broken down or when it is desired to restart machining operation aftera day off, and restarts the machining operation from that block. It can alsobe used as a high–spe...

  • Page 829

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION803Procedure for Program Restart by Specifying a Sequence Number1Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary,change the offset. (Go to step 2.)1When power is turned ON or emergency stop is released, perform allnecessary operations ...

  • Page 830

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/028045 The sequence number is searched for, and the program restart screenappears on the LCD display.PROGRAM RESTARTDESTINATIONX 57. 096Y 56. 877Z 56. 943M12121212121 **************** ********T ******** ********S *****O0002 N01000S 0 T0000MEM *...

  • Page 831

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION805Procedure for Program Restart by Specifying a Block Number1Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary,change the offset. (Go to step 2.)1When power is turned ON or emergency stop is released, perform allnecessary operations at ...

  • Page 832

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02806The coordinates and amount of travel for restarting the program canbe displayed for up to five axes. If your system supports six or moreaxes, pressing the [RSTR] soft key again displays the data for thesixth and subsequent axes. (The program resta...

  • Page 833

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION807< Example 2 >CNC ProgramNumber of blocksO 0001 ;G90 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;G90 G00 Z100. ;G81 X100. Y0. Z–120. R–80. F50. ;#1 = #1 + 1 ;#2 = #2 + 1 ;#3 = #3 + 1 ;G00 X0 Z0 ;M30 ;123444456Macro statements are not counted as blocks.The block number i...

  • Page 834

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02808When single block operation is ON during movement to the restartposition, operation stops every time the tool completes movement alongan axis. When operation is stopped in the single block mode, MDIintervention cannot be performed.During movement t...

  • Page 835

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION809The schedule function allows the operator to select files (programs)registered on a floppy–disk in an external input/output device (HandyFile, Floppy Cassette, or FA Card) and specify the execution order andnumber of repetitions (scheduling) for p...

  • Page 836

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02810Procedure for Scheduling Function1Press the MEMORY switch on the machine operator’s panel, thenpress the PROG function key on the MDI panel.2Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key), then press the[FL. SDL] soft key. A list of files reg...

  • Page 837

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION8114Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator’s panel to enterthe RMT mode, then press the cycle start switch. The selected file isexecuted. For details on the REMOTE switch, refer to the manualsupplied by the machine tool builder. The selec...

  • Page 838

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02812Move the cursor and enter the file numbers and number of repetitionsin the order in which to execute the files. At this time, the currentnumber of repetitions “CUR.REP” is 0.5Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator’s panel to enterthe ...

  • Page 839

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION813During the execution of file, the floppy directory display of backgroundediting cannot be referenced.To resume automatic operation after it is suspended for scheduledoperation, press the reset button.The scheduling function can be used only for a si...

  • Page 840

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02814The subprogram call function is provided to call and execute subprogramfiles stored in an external input/output device(Handy File, FLOPPYCASSETTE, FA Card)during memory operation.When the following block in a program in CNC memory is executed, asubp...

  • Page 841

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION815For the two–path control, subprograms in a floppy cassette cannot becalled for the two tool posts at the same time.NOTE1 When M198 in the program of the file saved in a floppycassette is executed, a P/S alarm (No.210) is given. Whena program in t...

  • Page 842

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02816The movement by manual handle operation can be done by overlappingit with the movement by automatic operation in the automatic operationmode.ZXProgrammed depth of cutDepth of cut by handle interruptionTool position afterhandle interruptionTool posit...

  • Page 843

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION817The following table indicates the relation between other functions and themovement by handle interrupt.DisplayRelationMachine lockMachine lock is effective. The tool does not moveeven when this signal turns on.InterlockInterlock is effective. Th...

  • Page 844

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02818(a) INPUT UNIT: Handle interrupt move amount in input unitsystem Indicates the travel distance specified by handleinterruption according to the least inputincrement.(b) OUTPUT UNI : Handle interrupt move amount in output unitsystem Indicates the tra...

  • Page 845

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION819During automatic operation, the mirror image function can be used formovement along an axis. To use this function, set the mirror image switchto ON on the machine operator’s panel, or set the mirror image setting toON from the MDI panel.YXY–axis...

  • Page 846

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/028202–4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set thetarget axis to 1.3Enter an automatic operation mode (memory mode or MDI mode),then press the cycle start button to start automatic operation.D The mirror image function can also...

  • Page 847

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION821The tool can be withdrawn from a workpiece in order to replace the toolwhen it is damaged during machining, or merely to check the status ofmachining. The tool can then be advanced again to restart machiningefficiently.XYZ: Position where the TOOL ...

  • Page 848

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02822Suppose that the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator’spanel is turned on when the tool is positioned at point A during executionof the N30 block.N30AMachine operator’s panelTOOLBEING WITH-DRAWNRETRAC-TION POSITIONTOOLWITH-DRAWTOOL RETUR...

  • Page 849

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION823Set the manual operation mode, then withdraw the tool. For manualoperation, either jog feed or handle feed is possible.3XYZ12456789101112E pointA pointProcedure3Withdrawal

  • Page 850

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02824After withdrawing the tool and any additional operation such as replacingthe tool, move the tool back to the previous retraction position. To return the tool to the retraction position, return the mode to automaticoperation mode, then turn the TOOL ...

  • Page 851

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION825While the tool is at the retraction position (point E in the figure below)and the RETRACTION POSITION LED is on, press the cycle startswitch. The tool is then repositioned at the point where retraction wasstarted (i.e. where the TOOL WITHDRAW switc...

  • Page 852

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02826To move the tool along an axis, select the corresponding axis selectionsignal. Never specify axis selection signals for two or more axes at a time.When the tool is moved in manual operation along an axis, the control unitmemorizes up to ten paths o...

  • Page 853

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION827With the retrace function, the tool can be moved in the reverse direction(reverse movement) by using the REVERSE switch during automaticoperation to trace the programmed path. The retrace function also enablesthe user to move the tool in the forwar...

  • Page 854

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02828Feed hold stopREVERSE switchrurned on cycle startCycle start(forward movement started)Reverse movement startedForward movementReverse movementThree methods are available for moving the tool in the forward directionagain along the retraced path.1) Wh...

  • Page 855

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION829Cycle start(forward movement started)Feed hold stop REVERSEswitch turned offCycle startForward return movement startedReverse movement startedForward movementReverse movementForward returnmovementWhen there are no more blocks for which to perform re...

  • Page 856

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02830Cycle start (forward movement started)Feed hold stopReverse movementsignal=1,cycle startReverse movement startedForward return movement startedForward movement startedForward movementReverse movementForward returnmovementIn automatic operation, a pr...

  • Page 857

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION831Upon reset (when the RESET key on the MDI panel is pressed, theexternal reset signal is applied, or the reset and rewind signal is applied),the memorized reverse movement blocks are cleared.A feedrate for reverse movement can be specified using para...

  • Page 858

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02832Be sure to specify the radius of an arc with R.WARNINGIf an end point is not correctly placed on an arc (if a leadingline is produced) when an arc center is specified using I, J,and K, the tool does not perform correct reverse movement.1. Never init...

  • Page 859

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION833In reverse movement and forward return movement, the skip signal andautomatic tool length measurement signal are ignored. In reversemovement and forward return movement, the tool moves along the pathactually followed in forward movement.Forward ret...

  • Page 860

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02834The M, S, and T functions, and secondary auxiliary functions (Bfunctions) are output directly in reverse movement and forward returnmovement.When an M, S, or T function, or secondary auxiliary function (B function)is specified in a block containing ...

  • Page 861

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION835In cases such as when tool movement along an axis is stopped by feed holdduring automatic operation so that manual intervention can be used toreplace the tool: When automatic operation is restarted, this functionreturns the tool to the position whe...

  • Page 862

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02836N1N2N1 Point AN2N1 Point AN2Point BN1 Point AN2B1. The N1 block cuts a workpieceToolBlock start point2. The tool is stopped by pressing the feed hold switch inthe middle of the N1 block (point A).3. After retracting the tool manually to point ...

  • Page 863

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION837“DNC operation with Memory Card” is a function that it is possible toperform machining with executing the program in the memory card,which is assembled to the memory card interface, where is the left sideof the screen.There are two methods to us...

  • Page 864

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02838NOTE1 To use this function, it is necessary to set the parameter ofNo.20 to 4 by setting screen. No.20 [I/O CHANEL: Setting to select an input/output unit]Setting value is 4.: It means using the memory cardinterface.2 When CNC control unit is a st...

  • Page 865

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION839When the following block in a program in CNC memory is executed, asubprogram file in memory card is called.1. Normal formatM198 Pffff ∆∆∆∆ ;File number for a file inthe memory cardNumber of repetitionMemory card call instruction2. FS15 tap...

  • Page 866

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/02840(1) The memory card can not be accessed, such as display of memory cardlist and so on, during the DNC operation with memory card.(2) It is possible to execute the DNC operation with memory card on multipath system. However, it is not possible to ca...

  • Page 867

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION841SpecificationRemarksA02B–0236–K160For 7.2″ LCD or 8.4″ LCDA02B–0236–K161For 9.5″ LCD or 10.4″ LCD1) How to assemble to the unitAssemble an attachment guide and a control unit to the cabinet byscrewing together as follow figure.The at...

  • Page 868

    OPERATION4. AUTOMATIC OPERATIONB–63534EN/028422) How to mount the card(a) Insert the card to slit of the attachment. Please pay attention to thedirection of the card. (Please mach the direction of ditch on thecard.)(b) Push up the card to the upper end of the attachment.3) Assembling of the a...

  • Page 869

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/024. AUTOMATIC OPERATION8434) Appearance after connectionNOTE1 In both case of stand–alone type i series and LCD–mountedtype i series, the memory card interface where is the left sideof the screen of the display unit. (The memory card interfaceon the stand–alone type c...

  • Page 870

    OPERATION5. TEST OPERATIONB–63534EN/028445 TEST OPERATIONThe following functions are used to check before actual machiningwhether the machine operates as specified by the created program.5.1 Machine Lock and Auxiliary Function Lock5.2 Feedrate Override5.3 Rapid Traverse Override5.4 Dry Run5.5 S...

  • Page 871

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/025. TEST OPERATION845To display the change in the position without moving the tool, usemachine lock.There are two types of machine lock: all–axis machine lock, which stopsthe movement along all axes, and specified–axis machine lock, whichstops the movement along specifi...

  • Page 872

    OPERATION5. TEST OPERATIONB–63534EN/02846M, S, T and B commands are executed in the machine lock state.When a G27, G28, or G30 command is issued in the machine lock state,the command is accepted but the tool does not move to the referenceposition and the reference position return LED does not g...

  • Page 873

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/025. TEST OPERATION847A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%)selected by the override dial.This feature is used to check a program.For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program,setting the override dial to 50% moves the t...

  • Page 874

    OPERATION5. TEST OPERATIONB–63534EN/02848An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to therapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421).ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇRapid traverserate10m/minOverride50%5m/minFig. 5.3 Rapid traverse overrideRapid Traverse OverrideSe...

  • Page 875

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/025. TEST OPERATION849The tool is moved at the feedrate specified by a parameter regardless ofthe feedrate specified in the program. This function is used for checkingthe movement of the tool under the state taht the workpiece is removedfrom the table.ToolTableFig. 5.4 Dry ...

  • Page 876

    OPERATION5. TEST OPERATIONB–63534EN/02850Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When thecycle start button is pressed in the single block mode, the tool stops aftera single block in the program is executed. Check the program in the singleblock mode by executing the pro...

  • Page 877

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/025. TEST OPERATION851If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at theintermediate point.In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of , , and shown below. When the single block stop is made after the point or , the feed hold LED light...

  • Page 878

    OPERATION6. SAFETY FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/028526 SAFETY FUNCTIONSTo immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stopbutton. To prevent the tool from exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravelcheck and Stroke check are available. This chapter describes emergencystop., overtravel check,...

  • Page 879

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/026. SAFETY FUNCTIONS853If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, themachine movement stops in a moment.EMERGENCY STOPRedFig. 6.1 Emergency stopThis button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with themachine tool builder, the button ...

  • Page 880

    OPERATION6. SAFETY FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02854When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine toollimit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limitswitch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed.YXDeceleration and stopStroke endLimit switchFig. 6.2 OvertravelWh...

  • Page 881

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/026. SAFETY FUNCTIONS855Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored strokecheck 1, stored stroke check 2, and stored stroke check 3.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ...

  • Page 882

    OPERATION6. SAFETY FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02856(I,J,K)ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ(X,Y,Z)X>I, Y>J, Z>KX–I >ζ (In least command increment)Y–J >ζ (In least command increment)Z–K >ζ ((In least command increment)G 22X_Y_Z_I_J_K_;ζ (mm)=750...

  • Page 883

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/026. SAFETY FUNCTIONS857Confirm the checking position (the top of the tool or the tool chuck) beforeprogramming the forbidden area.If point A (The top of the tool) is checked in Fig. 6.3 (d) , the distance “a”should be set as the data for the stored stroke limit function....

  • Page 884

    OPERATION6. SAFETY FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02858If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can bemoved only in the backward direction. To cancel the alarm, move the toolbackward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the system. Whenthe alarm is canceled, the tool...

  • Page 885

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/026. SAFETY FUNCTIONS859During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a givenblock is started, whether the tool enters the inhibited area defined bystored stroke limit 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the position of theend point from the current position o...

  • Page 886

    OPERATION6. SAFETY FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02860Example 2)Start pointEnd pointThe tool is stopped at point a accordingto stored stroke limit 1 or 2.Immediately upon movement commencingfrom the start point, the tool is stopped toenable a stroke limit check to be performedbefore movement.aInhibited ar...

  • Page 887

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/026. SAFETY FUNCTIONS861In cylindrical interpolation mode, no check is made.In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made.When the angulalr axis control option is selected, no check is made.In simple synchronous control, only the master axis is checked; no slaveaxe...

  • Page 888

    OPERATION7. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/028627 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONSWhen an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicatethe cause of the alarm. The causes of alarms are classified by error codes.Up to 25 previous alarms can be stored and displ...

  • Page 889

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/027. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSISFUNCTIONS863When an alarm occurs, the alarm screen appears.ARALMALARM MESSAGEMDI**********18 : 52 : 05000000000100PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE510OVER TR1AVEL :+X520OVER TRAVEL:+2530OVER TRAVEL:+3MSGHISTRYS 0 T0000ALM In some cases, the alarm scre...

  • Page 890

    OPERATION7. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02864Error codes and messages indicate the cause of an alarm. To recover froman alarm, eliminate the cause and press the reset key.The error codes are classified as follows:No. 000 to 255: P/S alarm (Program errors) (*)No. 300 to 349: A...

  • Page 891

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/027. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSISFUNCTIONS865Up to 25 of the most recent CNC alarms are stored and displayed on thescreen.Display the alarm history as follows:Procedure for Alarm History Display1 Press the function key MESSAGE .2Press the chapter selection soft key [HISTRY].Th...

  • Page 892

    OPERATION7. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02866The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm hasoccurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing.The state of the system can be checked by displaying the self–diagnosticscreen.Procedure for...

  • Page 893

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/027. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSISFUNCTIONS867Diagnostic numbers 000 to 015 indicate states when a command is beingspecified but appears as if it were not being executed. The table belowlists the internal states when 1 is displayed at the right end of each line onthe screen.Tab...

  • Page 894

    OPERATION7. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONSB–63534EN/02868The table below shows the signals and states which are enabled when eachdiagnostic data item is 1. Each combination of the values of the diagnosticdata indicates a unique state.020021022023024025111111111111110000000000000000000000...

  • Page 895

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT8698 DATA INPUT/OUTPUTNC data is transferred between the NC and external input/output devicessuch as the Handy File. The memory card interface located to the left of the display can be usedto read information on a memory card in the CNC or write it to t...

  • Page 896

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02870Of the external input/output devices, the FANUC Handy File use floppydisks as their input/output medium.In this manual, these input/output medium is generally referred to as afloppy.Unlike an NC tape, a floppy allows the user to freely choose from sev...

  • Page 897

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT871The floppy is provided with the write protect switch. Set the switch tothe write enable state. Then, start output operation.(2) Write–enabled (Reading, writing, and deletion are possible.)(1) Write–protected(Only reading ispossible.)Write protect...

  • Page 898

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02872When the program is input from the floppy, the file to be input firstmust be searched.For this purpose, proceed as follows:File 1File searching of the file nFile nBlankFile 2File 3File heading1 Press the EDIT or MEMORY switch on the machine operator...

  • Page 899

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT873Alarm No.Description86The ready signal (DR) of an input/output device is off.An alarm is not immediately indicated in the CNC even when analarm occurs during head searching (when a file is not found, orthe like).An alarm is given when the input/output...

  • Page 900

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02874Files stored on a floppy can be deleted file by file as required.File deletion1Insert the floppy into the input/output device so that it is ready forwriting.2Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.3Press function key PROG, then the pr...

  • Page 901

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT875This section describes how to load a program into the CNC from a floppyor NC tape.Inputting a program1Make sure the input device is ready for reading.For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a program tobe input is used with the tool...

  • Page 902

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02876• When a program is entered without specifying a program number.⋅ The O–number of the program on the NC tape is assigned to theprogram. If the program has no O–number, the N–number in the first block isassigned to the program.⋅ When the p...

  • Page 903

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT877S Pressing the [CHAIN] soft key positions the cursor to the end of theregistered program. Once a program has been input, the cursor ispositioned to the start of the new program.S Additional input is possible only when a program has already beenregist...

  • Page 904

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02878A program stored in the memory of the CNC unit is output to a floppy orNC tape.Outputting a program1Make sure the output device is ready for output.For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a program tobe output is used with the tool ...

  • Page 905

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT879Head searching with a file No. is necessary when a file output from theCNC to the floppy is again input to the CNC memory or compared withthe content of the CNC memory. Therefore, immediately after a file isoutput from the CNC to the floppy, record t...

  • Page 906

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02880Offset data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from a floppy or NCtape. The input format is the same as for offset value output. See III– 8.5.2.When an offset value is loaded which has the same offset number as anoffset number already registered i...

  • Page 907

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT881All offset data is output in a output format from the memory of the CNCto a floppy or NC tape.Outputting offset data1Make sure the output device is ready for output.For the two–path control, select the tool post for which offset data tobe input is u...

  • Page 908

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02882Parameters and pitch error compensation data are input and output fromdifferent screens, respectively. This chapter describes how to enter them.Parameters are loaded into the memory of the CNC unit from a floppy orNC tape. The input format is the sam...

  • Page 909

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT88315Turn the power to the CNC back on.16Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’spanel.All parameters are output in the defined format from the memory of theCNC to a floppy or NC tape.Outputting parameters1Make sure the output device...

  • Page 910

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02884When the floppy disk directory display function is used, the name of theoutput file is PARAMETER.Once all parameters have been output, the output file is named ALLPARAMETER. Once only parameters which are set to other than 0 havebeen output, the outp...

  • Page 911

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT88515Turn the power to the CNC back on.16Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’spanel.Parameters 3620 to 3624 and pitch error compensation data must be setcorrectly to apply pitch error compensation correctly (See III–11.5.2).All ...

  • Page 912

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02886The value of a custom macro common variable (#500 to #999) is loadedinto the memory of the CNC from a floppy or NC tape. The same formatused to output custom macro common variables is used for input. SeeIII–8.7.2. For a custom macro common variab...

  • Page 913

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT887Custom macro common variables (#500 to #999) stored in the memoryof the CNC can be output in the defined format to a floppy or NC tape.Outputting custom macro common variable1Make sure the output device is ready for output.2Specify the punch code syst...

  • Page 914

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02888On the floppy directory display screen, a directory of the FANUC HandyFile, FANUC Floppy Cassette, or FANUC FA Card files can be displayed.In addition, those files can be loaded, output, and deleted. O0001 N00000 (METER) VOLEDIT **********11 : 51 : 1...

  • Page 915

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT889Displaying the directory of floppy cassette filesUse the following procedure to display a directory of all thefiles stored in a floppy:1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.2Press function key PROG.3Press the rightmost soft key (nex...

  • Page 916

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02890Use the following procedure to display a directory of filesstarting with a specified file number :1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.2Press function key PROG.3Press the rightmost soft key(next–menu key).4Press soft key [FLOPPY]...

  • Page 917

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT891NO :Displays the file numberFILE NAME: Displays the file name.(METER): Converts and prints out the file capacity to paper tapelength.You can also produce H(FEET)I by setting the INPUT UNIT to INCH of the setting data.VOL.: When the file is multi–vol...

  • Page 918

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02892The contents of the specified file number are read to the memory of NC.Reading files1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a file is to beinput in memory with the tool post s...

  • Page 919

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT893Any program in the memory of the CNC unit can be output to a floppyas a file.Outputting programs1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a file is to beinput in memory with the...

  • Page 920

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02894The file with the specified file number is deleted.Deleting files1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.2Press function key PROG.3Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).4Press soft key [FLOPPY].5Press soft key [(OPRT)].6Pres...

  • Page 921

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT895If [F SET] or [O SET] is pressed without key inputting file number andprogram number, file number or program number shows blank. When0 is entered for file numbers or program numbers, 1 is displayed.To use channel 0 ,set a device number in parameter...

  • Page 922

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02896CNC programs stored in memory can be grouped according to theirnames, thus enabling the output of CNC programs in group units. SectionIII–11.3.2 explains the display of a program listing for a specified group.Procedure for Outputting a Program List...

  • Page 923

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT897To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen isusually selected. For example, the parameter screen is used for parameterinput from or output to an external input/output unit, while the programscreen is used for program input or...

  • Page 924

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02898Input/output–related parameters can be set on the ALL IO screen.Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode. Setting input/output–related parameters1Press function key SYSTEM.2Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) several times.3Pre...

  • Page 925

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT899A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specifythe input file containing the program (file search).File search1Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in ...

  • Page 926

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/029006Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC]. The specified file is found.When a file already exists in a cassette or card, specifying N0 or N1 hasthe same effect. If N1 is specified when there is no file on the cassette orcard, an alarm is issued because the...

  • Page 927

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT901Inputting a program1Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section8.10.1.2Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.3Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shownbelow.⋅ A program directory is displa...

  • Page 928

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02902Outputting programs1Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section8.10.1.2Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.3Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shownbelow.⋅ A program directory is displa...

  • Page 929

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT903Deleting files1Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section8.10.1.2Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.3Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shownbelow.⋅ A program directory is displayed o...

  • Page 930

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02904Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.Inputting parameters1Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section8.10.1.2Select EDIT mode.3Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shownbelow.READ/PUN...

  • Page 931

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT905Outputting parameters1Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section8.10.1.2Select EDIT mode.3Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shownbelow.READ/PUNCH (PARAMETER)O1234 N12345MDI *************12:34:56READPUN...

  • Page 932

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02906Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.Inputting offset data1Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section8.10.1.2Select EDIT mode.3Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shownbelow.READ/...

  • Page 933

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT907Outputting offset data1Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section8.10.1.2Select EDIT mode.3Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shownbelow.READ/PUNCH (OFFSET)O1234 N12345MDI *************12:34:56READPUNC...

  • Page 934

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02908Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen.Outputting custom macro common variables1Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section8.10.1.2Select EDIT mode.3Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys ...

  • Page 935

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT909The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, aswell as the input and output of floppy files.Displaying a file directory1Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IOscreen, described in Section 8.10.1.2Press s...

  • Page 936

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02910READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) No.FILE NAMEO1234 N12345(Meter) VOLEDIT *************12:34:56F SRHEXEC0001PARAMETER0002ALL.PROGRAM0003O00010004O00020005O00030006O00040007O00050008O00100009O0020F SRHFile No.=2>2_CAN46.112.311.911.911.911.911.911.911.9A directo...

  • Page 937

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT911Inputting a file1Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IOscreen, described in Section 8.10.1.2Press soft key [FLOPPY].3Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.4Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as...

  • Page 938

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02912Outputting a file1Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IOscreen, described in Section 8.10.1.2Press soft key [FLOPPY].3Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.4Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change a...

  • Page 939

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT913Deleting a file1Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IOscreen, described in Section 8.10.1.2Press soft key [FLOPPY].3Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.4Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as ...

  • Page 940

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02914By setting the I/O channel (parameter No. 0020) to 4, files on a memorycard inserted into the memory card interface located to the left of thedisplay can be referenced. Different types of data such as part programs,parameters, and offset data on a me...

  • Page 941

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT915Displaying a directory of stored files1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.2Press function key PROG.3Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).4Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. Usingpage keys and...

  • Page 942

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02916Searching for a file1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.2Press function key PROG.3Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).4Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed.PROG(OPRT)DIR +DIRECTORY (M–CARD) N...

  • Page 943

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT917Reading a file1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.2Press function key PROG.3Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).4Press soft key [CARD]. Then, the screen shown below is displayed.PROG(OPRT)DIR +DIRECTORY (M–CARD...

  • Page 944

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/029188To specify a file with its file name, press soft key [N READ] in step 6above. The screen shown below is displayed.F NAMEEXECSTOPO SETCANDIRECTORY (M–CARD) No.FILE NAMECOMMENTO0001 N000100012O0050(MAIN PROGRAM)0013 TESTPRO(SUB PROGRAM–1)0014O00...

  • Page 945

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT919Writing a file1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.2Press function key PROG.3Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).4Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed.PROG(OPRT)DIR +DIRECTORY (M–CARD) No.FILE...

  • Page 946

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02920When a file having the same name is already registered in the memorycard, the existing file will be overwritten.To write all programs, set program number = –9999. If no file name isspecified in this case, file name PROGRAM.ALL is used for registrat...

  • Page 947

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT921Deleting a file1Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.2Press function key PROG.3Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).4Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed.PROG(OPRT)DIR +DIRECTORY (M–CARD) No.FIL...

  • Page 948

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02922Batch input/output with a memory cardOn the ALL IO screen, different types of data including part programs,parameters, offset data, pitch error data, custom macros, and workpiececoordinate system data can be input and output using a memory card; thesc...

  • Page 949

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT923When this screen is displayed, the program data item is selected. The softkeys for other screens are displayed by pressing the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).MACRO(OPRT)WORKPITCHWhen a data item other than program is selected, the screen displa...

  • Page 950

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02924File format and error messagesAll files that are read from and written to a memory card are of text format.The format is described below.A file starts with % or LF, followed by the actual data. A file always endswith %. In a read operation, data bet...

  • Page 951

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT925CodeMeaning99A part preceding the FAT area on the memory card is destroyed.102The memory card does not have sufficient free space.105No memory card is mounted.106A memory card is already mounted.110The specified directory cannot be found.111There are ...

  • Page 952

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02926The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.A list of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the host computer isdisplayed.1Press the function key PROG.2Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display...

  • Page 953

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT927NOTEDepending on the FTP server software, the number ofdisplayed programs may differ between the host file listscreen above and the host file list (detail) screen describedbelow.5When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can bes...

  • Page 954

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02928NOTEThe host file list (detail) screen shown above is an exampleof screen display, and information displayed may varyaccording to the specification of the FTP server used withthe host computer.Display itemsThe number of files registered in the directo...

  • Page 955

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT929This operation outputs a file held in the CNC part program storage to thehard disk embedded to the host computer. This soft key is displayed onlywhen 9 is set as the input/output device number of the CNC, and the CNCis placed in the EDIT mode.When a ...

  • Page 956

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02930A file (NC program) on the host computer can be read to the CNCmemory.For the host file list screen1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Display the host file list screen.3Press the [READ] soft key.4Type the file number or file name of an NC program to be ...

  • Page 957

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT931For the program screen1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Press the function key PROG.3Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears.5Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.6Press the...

  • Page 958

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02932A file (NC program) in the CNC memory can be output to the hostcomputer.For the host file list screen1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Display the host file list screen.3Press the [PUNCH] soft key.4Type the O number of an NC program to be output, with ...

  • Page 959

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT9339Press the [EXEC] soft key.10During output, “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of thescreen.NOTEAn outputted file name is Oxxxx.With the FTP file transfer function, the types of data listed below can beinput/output. This subsection descr...

  • Page 960

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02934Parameter outputThe file (NC parameter) in the CNC memory can be output to the hostcomputer.1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Press the function key SYSTEM.3Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4Press the [PARAM] soft ...

  • Page 961

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT935Tool offset value outputThe file (tool offset value) in the CNC memory can be output to the hostcomputer.1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Press the function key OFFSETSETTING.3Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4Pre...

  • Page 962

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02936Workpiece origin offset value outputThe file (workpiece origin offset value) in the CNC memory can be outputto the host computer.1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Press the function key OFFSETSETTING.3Press the continuous menu key at the right end of t...

  • Page 963

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT937Pitch error compensation outputThe file (pitch error compensation) in the CNC memory can be output tothe host computer.1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Press the function key SYSTEM.3Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key displ...

  • Page 964

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02938M code group outputThe file (M code group) in the CNC memory can be output to the hostcomputer.1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Press the function key SYSTEM.3Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4Press the [M–CODE]...

  • Page 965

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT939Operation history data outputThe file (operation history data) in the CNC memory can be output to thehost computer.1Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.2Press the function key SYSTEM.3Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.4...

  • Page 966

    OPERATION8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUTB–63534EN/02940The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet functiondevice.The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed.The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When nooption board is installed, no information is displayed.4When you press t...

  • Page 967

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT941NOTEThe title of the host computer that is the currentcommunication destination of the data server board isdisplayed in reverse video.5The connected host can be changed by pressing the [CON–1],[CON–2], or [CON–3] soft key.Display itemsThose valu...

  • Page 968

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/029429 EDITING PROGRAMSThis chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC.Editing includes the insertion, modification, deletion, and replacement ofwords. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automaticinsertion of sequenc...

  • Page 969

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS943This section outlines the procedure for inserting, modifying, and deletinga word in a program registered in memory.Procedure for inserting, altering and deleting a word1Select EDIT mode.2Press PROG.3Select a program to be edited.If a program to be edit...

  • Page 970

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02944A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text(scanning), by word search, or by address search.Procedure for scanning a program1Press the cursor key .The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor isdisplayed a...

  • Page 971

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS945Procedure for searching a wordExample) of Searching for S12PROGRAMO0050 N01234O0050 ;X100.0 Z1250.0 ;S12 ;N56789 M03 ;M02 ;%N01234N01234 is beingsearched for/scanned currently.S12 is searchedfor.1Key in addressS .2Key in 12 .⋅ S12 cannot be s...

  • Page 972

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02946The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. This function is calledheading the program pointer. This section describes the three methodsfor heading the program pointer.Procedure for Heading a Program1Press RESET when the program screen is sele...

  • Page 973

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS947Procedure for inserting a word1Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted.2Key in an address to be inserted.3Key in data.4Press the INSERT key.Example of Inserting T151Search for or scan Z1250.ProgramO0050 N01234O0050 ;N0123...

  • Page 974

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02948Procedure for altering a word1Search for or scan a word to be altered.2Key in an address to be inserted.3Key in data.4Press the ALTER key.Example of changing T15 to M151Search for or scan T15.ProgramO0050 N01234O0050 ;N01234 X100.0 Z1250.0S12 ;N56...

  • Page 975

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS949Procedure for deleting a word1Search for or scan a word to be deleted.2Press the DELETE key.Example of deleting X100.01Search for or scan X100.0.ProgramO0050 N01234O0050 ;N01234S12 ;N56789 M03 ;M02 ;%X100.0X100.0 issearched for/scanned.Z1250.0 M...

  • Page 976

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02950A block or blocks can be deleted in a program.The procedure below deletes a block up to its EOB code; the cursoradvances to the address of the next word.Procedure for deleting a block1Search for or scan address N for a block to be deleted.2Key in EOB.3...

  • Page 977

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS951The blocks from the currently displayed word to the block with a specifiedsequence number can be deleted.Procedure for deleting multiple blocks1Search for or scan a word in the first block of a portion to be deleted.2Key in address N .3Key in the seque...

  • Page 978

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02952When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for.There are three methods as follows.Procedure for program number search1Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.2Press PROGto display the program screen.3Key in addressO .4Key in a program number to ...

  • Page 979

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS953Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for asequence number in the middle of a program so that execution can bestarted or restarted at the block of the sequence number. Example)Sequence number 02346 in a program (O0002) issearched f...

  • Page 980

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02954Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC. This means that thedata in the skipped blocks such as coordinates and M, S, and T codes doesnot alter the CNC coordinates and modal values.So, in the first block where execution is to be started or ...

  • Page 981

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS955Programs registered in memory can be deleted,either one program by oneprogram or all at once. Also, More than one program can be deleted byspecifying a range.A program registered in memory can be deleted.Procedure for deleting one program1Select the E...

  • Page 982

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02956Programs within a specified range in memory are deleted.Procedure for deleting more than one program by specifying a range1Select the EDIT mode.2Press PROGto display the program screen.3Enter the range of program numbers to be deleted with address andn...

  • Page 983

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS957With the extended part program editing function, the operations describedbelow can be performed using soft keys for programs that have beenregistered in memory.Following editing operations are available :⋅ All or part of a program can be copied or mo...

  • Page 984

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02958A new program can be created by copying a program.AOxxxxAOxxxxAfter copyAOyyyyCopyBefore copyFig. 9.6.1 Copying an Entire ProgramIn Fig. 9.6.1, the program with program number xxxx is copied to a newlycreated program with program number yyyy. The prog...

  • Page 985

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS959A new program can be created by copying part of a program.BOxxxxOxxxxAfter copyBOyyyyCopyBefore copyFig. 9.6.2 Copying Part of a ProgramACBACIn Fig. 9.6.2, part B of the program with program number xxxx is copiedto a newly created program with program...

  • Page 986

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02960A new program can be created by moving part of a program.BOxxxxOxxxxAfter copyBOyyyyCopyBefore copyFig. 9.6.3 Moving Part of a ProgramACACIn Fig. 9.6.3, part B of the program with program number xxxx is movedto a newly created program with program num...

  • Page 987

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS961Another program can be inserted at an arbitrary position in the currentprogram.OxxxxBefore mergeBOyyyyMergeFig. 9.6.4 Merging a program at a specified locationAOxxxxAfter mergeBOyyyyBACCMergelocationIn Fig. 9.6.4, the program with program number XXXX ...

  • Page 988

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02962The setting of an editing range start point with [CRSR] can be changedfreely until an editing range end point is set with [CRSR] or [BTTM].If an editing range start point is set after an editing range end point, theediting range must be reset starting ...

  • Page 989

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS963Alarm no.Contents70101Memory became insufficient while copying or insertinga program. Copy or insertion is terminated.The power was interrupted during copying, moving, orinserting a program and memory used for editing mustbe cleared. When this alarm oc...

  • Page 990

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02964Replace one or more specified words.Replacement can be applied to all occurrences or just one occurrence ofspecified words or addresses in the program.Procedure for hange of words or addresses1Perform steps 1 to 5 in III–9.6.1.2Press soft key [CHANGE...

  • Page 991

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS965The following custom macro words are replaceable:IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, BPRNT, DPRINT, POPEN, PCLOSThe abbreviations of custom macro words can be specified.When abbreviations are used, however, the screen displays theabbreviations as they are key in...

  • Page 992

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02966Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified,inserted, or deleted based on editing units.Custom macro words can be entered in abbreviated form.Comments can be entered in a program.Refer to the III–10.1 for the comments of a program.Wh...

  • Page 993

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS967Editing a program while executing another program is called backgroundediting. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing(foreground editing).A program edited in the background should be registered in foregroundprogram memory by performi...

  • Page 994

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02968The password function (bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202) can be lockedusing parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD) and parameter No. 3211(KEYWD) to protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999. In the locked state,parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0. In this state, program ...

  • Page 995

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS969When 0 is set in the parameter PASSWD, the number 0 is displayed, andthe password function is disabled. In other words, the password functioncan be disabled by either not setting parameter PASSWD at all, or bysetting 0 in parameter PASSWD after step 3...

  • Page 996

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02970For a 2–path control CNC, setting bit 0 (PCP) of parameter No. 3206 to1 enables the copying of a specified machining program from one path toanother. Single–program copy and specified–range copy are supported.Procedure for copying a program betw...

  • Page 997

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS9716Select one or more programs to be copied.⋅ Single–program copy(1) Enter the number of the program to be copied.→ ” ”(2) Press soft key [SOURCE] to set the number.→ SOURCE:PATH?=” ”⋅ Specified–range copy(1) Enter the range o...

  • Page 998

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02972Not set (selected O number)Program screenEdit mode/BG edit modeSet the data protection key to ON (enable editing)Soft key for starting setting for copy between paths [P COPY]Not set (selected O number)<”SOURCE” set?>Set<”DEST” set?>...

  • Page 999

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/029. EDITING PROGRAMS973Major related alarm numbersAlarm numberDescriptionRelevant pathP/S 70,70 BP/S0P/S 71,71 BP/SP/S 72,72 BP/SP/S 73,73 BP/SP/S 75,75 BP/SInsufficient free memorySpecified program not foundToo many programsDuplicate registrationProtected program numberCopy...

  • Page 1000

    OPERATION9. EDITING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02974Even if replacement is enabled, the program is not replaced if the partprogram storage for the copy destination path does not have sufficient freespace. During background editing, copying by replacing the currentlyrunning program is not allowed.CAUTIO...

  • Page 1001

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0210. CREATING PROGRAMS97510 CREATING PROGRAMSPrograms can be created using any of the following methods:⋅ MDI keyboard⋅ PROGRAMMING IN TEACH IN MODE⋅ CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING INPUT WITH GRAPHICFUNCTION⋅ CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION⋅ AUTOMATIC PRO...

  • Page 1002

    OPERATION10. CREATING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02976Programs can be created in the EDIT mode using the program editingfunctions described in III–9.Procedure for Creating Programs Using the MDI Panel1Enter the EDIT mode.2Press the PROGkey.3Press address key O and enter the program number.4Press the I...

  • Page 1003

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0210. CREATING PROGRAMS977Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted in each block when aprogram is created using the MDI keys in the EDIT mode.Set the increment for sequence numbers in parameter 3216.Procedure for automatic insertion of sequence numbers1Set 1 for SEQUENC...

  • Page 1004

    OPERATION10. CREATING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/029789Press INSERT. The EOB is registered in memory and sequence numbersare automatically inserted. For example, if the initial value of N is 10and the parameter for the increment is set to 2, N12 inserted anddisplayed below the line where a new block i...

  • Page 1005

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0210. CREATING PROGRAMS979When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode andTEACH IN HANDLE mode are added. In these modes, a machine positionalong the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual operation is stored inmemory as a program position to create a program.The...

  • Page 1006

    OPERATION10. CREATING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/029801 Set the setting data SEQUENCE NO. to 1 (on). (The incremental valueparameter (No. 3216) is assumed to be “1”.)2 Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode.3 Make positioning at position P0 by the manual pulse generator.4 Select the program screen.5 Enter...

  • Page 1007

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0210. CREATING PROGRAMS981The contents of memory can be checked in the TEACH IN mode by usingthe same procedure as in EDIT mode.PROGRAMO1234 N00004(RELATIVE)(ABSOLUTE)X –6.975X 3.025Y 23.723Y 23.723Z –10.325Z –0.325O1234 ;N1 G92 X10000...

  • Page 1008

    OPERATION10. CREATING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02982Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screenwhile displaying the G code menu.Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G codemenu and conversational screen.Procedure for Conversational Programming w...

  • Page 1009

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0210. CREATING PROGRAMS9834Press the [C.A.P] soft key. The following G code menu is displayedon the screen.If soft keys different from those shown in step 2 are displayed, pressthe menu return key to display the correct soft keys.PROGRAMO1234 N00004G00: POSITIONINGG01: LINE...

  • Page 1010

    OPERATION10. CREATING PROGRAMSB–63534EN/02984**********O0010 N00000PROGRAMGGGGXYZHFRMSTB IJKPQL :EDIT14 : 41 : 10(OPRT)PRGRMG.MENUBLOCK7Move the cursor to the block to be modified on the program screen.At this time, a data address with the cursor blinks.8Enter numeric data by pressing the nume...

  • Page 1011

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0210. CREATING PROGRAMS9854After data is changed completely, press the ALTER key. This operationreplaces an entire block of a program.1On the conversational screen, display the block immediately before anew block is to be inserted, by using the page keys. On the programscre...

  • Page 1012

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/0298611 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATATo operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI panelfor the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of operation with datadisplayed during operation.This chapter describes how to display an...

  • Page 1013

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA987POSScreen transition triggered by the function key POSPOSITION DISPLAY SCREENCurrent position screenPosition display ofworkpiece coordinate system⇒ See III-11.1.1.Display of partcount and runtime⇒ See III-11.1.6.Display of actualspeed...

  • Page 1014

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/02988Program screenDisplay of program contents⇒ See III-11.2.1.Display of currentblock and modaldata⇒ See III-11.2.2.PRGRMCHECKCURRNTNEXT(OPRT)PROGScreen transition triggered by the function keyin the MEMORY or MDI modePROGPROGRAM SCREENMEM...

  • Page 1015

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA989Program editingscreen⇒ See III-9Program memoryand program directory⇒ See III-11.3.1.PRGRMLIBC.A.P.(OPRT)PROGEDITConversationalprogrammingscreen⇒ See III-10.4FLOPPY(OPRT)EDITFile directoryscreen forfloppy disks⇒ See III-8.8Program sc...

  • Page 1016

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/02990Software operator's panel switchåSee subsec. 11.4.10.Tool offset valueDisplay of tooloffset value⇒ See III-11.4.1.OFFSETSETTINGWORK(OPRT)Screen transition triggered by the function keyOFFSETSETTINGOFFSETSETTINGOFFSET/SETTING SCREENDispla...

  • Page 1017

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA991Parameter screenPARAMDGNOSSYSTEM(OPRT)PITCH(OPRT)SYSTEMSYSTEMSYSTEM SCREENPMCDisplay ofparameter screen⇒ See III-11.5.1Setting of parameter⇒ See III-11.5.1Display ofdiagnosisscreen⇒ See III-7.3SV.PRMSP.PRMDisplay of pitcherror data⇒...

  • Page 1018

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/02992The table below lists the data set on each screen.Table. 11 Setting screens and data on themNo.Setting screenContents of settingReferenceitem1Tool offset valueTool offset valueTool length offset valueCutter compensation valueIII–11.4.1To...

  • Page 1019

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA993Press function key POS to display the current position of the tool.The following three screens are used to display the current position of thetool:⋅Position display screen for the work coordinate system.⋅Position display screen for the ...

  • Page 1020

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/02994Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinatesystem. The current position changes as the tool moves. The least inputincrement is used as the unit for numeric values. The title at the top ofthe screen indicates tha...

  • Page 1021

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA995ACTUAL POSITIONO1000 N10010X1100.000Y1200.000Z1300.000(ACTUAL SPEED) F :0MM/MINS :0RPM(PARTS COUNT)114(RUN TIME)5H 3M(CYCLE TIME)0H 0M 6S+O2000 N20010X2400.000Y2500.000Z2600.000ALLD Display with two–path control (12 soft keys display unit...

  • Page 1022

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/02996Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate systembased on the coordinates set by the operator. The current position changesas the tool moves. The increment system is used as the unit for numericvalues. The title a...

  • Page 1023

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA997ACTUAL POSITIONO1000 N10010X1100.000Y1200.000Z1300.000(ACTUAL SPEED) F :0MM/MINS :0RPM(PARTS COUNT)114(RUN TIME)5H 3M(CYCLE TIME)0H 0M 6SABSREL(OPRT)+O2000 N20010X2400.000Y2500.000Z2600.000ALLHNDLD Display with two–path control) (12 soft ...

  • Page 1024

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/02998Bits 6 and 7 of parameter 3104 (DRL, DRC) can be used to select whetherthe displayed values include tool length offset and cutter compensation.Bit 3 of parameter 3104 (PPD) is used to specify whether the displayedpositions in the relative c...

  • Page 1025

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA999Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of thetool in the workpiece coordinate system, relative coordinate system, andmachine coordinate system, and the remaining distance. The relativecoordinates can also be set...

  • Page 1026

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021000ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N10010(ACTUAL SPEED)F :0MM/MINS :0RPM(PARTS COUNT)114(RUN TIME) 5H 3M(CYCLE TIME) 0H 0M 6SABSREL+O2000 N20010ALLD Display with two–path control (12 soft keys display unit)(RELATIVE)(ACTUAL SPEED)F :0MM/MINS :0RPM(PA...

  • Page 1027

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1001A workpiece coordinate system shifted by an operation such as manualintervention can be preset using MDI operations to a pre–shift workpiececoordinate system. The latter coordinate system is displaced from themachine zero point by a wor...

  • Page 1028

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021002The actual feedrate on the machine (per minute) can be displayed on acurrent position display screen or program check screen by setting bit 0(DPF) of parameter 3105. On the 12 soft keys display unit, the actualfeedrate is always displayed...

  • Page 1029

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1003In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units ofdeg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that time.For example, when the rotary axis moves at 50 deg/min, the following isdisplayed: 0.50 I...

  • Page 1030

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021004The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayedon the current position display screens.Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display screen1Press function key POS to display a cu...

  • Page 1031

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1005To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, thefloating reference position must be set beforehand.Procedure for setting the floating reference position1Press function key POS to display a screen used for displaying ...

  • Page 1032

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021006The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis andthe serial spindle by setting bit 5 (OPM) of parameter 3111 to 1. Thereading on the speedometer can also be displayed for the serial spindle.Procedure for displaying th...

  • Page 1033

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1007Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindlemotor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by settingbit 6 (OPS) of parameter 3111 to 1.The spindle speed to be displayed during operation monitoring ...

  • Page 1034

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021008This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function keyPROG in MEMORY or MDI mode.The first four of the following screensdisplay the execution state for the program currently being executed inMEMORY or MDI mode and the last s...

  • Page 1035

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1009Displays the program currently being executed in MEMORY or MDImode.Procedure for displaying the program contents1Press function key PROG to display the program screen.2Press chapter selection soft key [PRGRM].The cursor is positioned at th...

  • Page 1036

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021010Displays the block currently being executed and modal data in theMEMORY or MDI mode.Procedure for displaying the current block display screen1Press function key PROG.2Press chapter selection soft key [CURRNT].The block currently being exec...

  • Page 1037

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1011Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executednext in the MEMORY or MDI mode.Procedure for displaying the next block display screen1Press function key PROG.2Press chapter selection soft key [NEXT].The block curren...

  • Page 1038

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021012Displays the program currently being executed, current position of thetool, and modal data in the MEMORY mode.Procedure for displaying the program check screen1Press function key PROG.2Press chapter selection soft key [CHECK].The program c...

  • Page 1039

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1013PROGRAM CHECKO1000 N01010 (MODAL)G00G22G40G98 MG17G94G49G50 MG90G21G80G67 M H TBF1000.000 (ACT.F)0MM/MINS20 (ACT.S)0RPM>_PRGRM(OPRT)+CHECKNEXT(RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE)(DIST TO GO) X1 0.000 X1 0...

  • Page 1040

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021014The program check screen is not provided for 12 soft keys display unit.Press soft key [PRGRM] to display the contents of the program on theright half of the screen. The block currently being executed is indicatedby the cursor. The curren...

  • Page 1041

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1015Displays the program input from the MDI and modal data in the MDImode.Procedure for displaying the program screen for MDI operation1Press function key PROG.2Press chapter selection soft key [MDI].The program input from the MDI and modal da...

  • Page 1042

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021016When a machining program is executed, the machining time of the mainprogram is displayed on the program machining time display screen. Themachining times of up to ten main programs are displayed inhours/minutes/seconds. When more than te...

  • Page 1043

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10175 To calculate the machining times of additional programs, repeat theabove procedure. The machining time display screen displays theexecuted main program numbers and their machining timessequentially.Note, that machining time data cannot ...

  • Page 1044

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/0210181To insert the calculated machining time of a program in a program as acomment, the machining time of the program must be displayed onthe machining time display screen. Before stamping the machiningtime of the program, check that the mach...

  • Page 1045

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10194If a comment already exists in the block containing the programnumber of a program whose machining time is to be inserted, themachining time is inserted after the existing comment.O0100(SHAFT XSF001) ;N10G92X100. Z10. ;N20S1500 M03 ;N30 G...

  • Page 1046

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021020Machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in memoryoperation mode to the next reset. If a reset does not occur duringoperation, machining time is counted from the start to M03 (or M30).However, note that the time duri...

  • Page 1047

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1021When the machining time inserted into a program is displayed on theprogram directory screen and the comment after the program numberconsists of only machining time data, the machining time is displayed inboth the program name display field...

  • Page 1048

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021022 EDIT *** *** *** *** 16:52:13[ INS–TM ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]PROGRAM O0260 N00000O0260 (SHAFT XSF302) (001H15M59S) (001H2...

  • Page 1049

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1023PROGRAM O0280 N00000O0280 (SHAFT XSF303) (1H10M59S)N10 G92 X100. Z10. ;N20 S1500 M03 ;N30 G00 X20.5 Z5. T0101 ;N40 G01 Z–10. F25. ;N50 G02 X16.5 Z–12. R2. ;N60 G01 X40. ;N70 X42. Z–13. ;N80 Z–50. ;N90 X44. Z–51. ;N1...

  • Page 1050

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021024This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function keyPROG in the EDIT mode. Function key PROG in the EDIT mode candisplay the program editing screen and the program list screen (displaysmemory used and a list of programs)....

  • Page 1051

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1025PROGRAM NO. USEDPROGRAM NO. USED: The number of the programs registered (including the subprograms)FREE: The number of programs which can beregistered additionally.MEMORY AREA USEDMEMORY AREA USED: The capacity of the program memory in whi...

  • Page 1052

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021026When no program has been deleted from the list, each program isregistered at the end of the list.If some programs in the list were deleted, then a new program isregistered, the new program is inserted in the empty location in the listcrea...

  • Page 1053

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1027In addition to the normal listing of the numbers and names of CNCprograms stored in memory, programs can be listed in units of groups,according to the product to be machined, for example.To assign CNC programs to the same group, assign nam...

  • Page 1054

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/0210288Pressing the [EXEC] operation soft key displays the group–unitprogram list screen, listing all those programs whose name includesthe specified character string. PROGRAM (NUM.)MEMORY (CHAR.) USED:603321FREE: 2 429O0020 (GEAR–1000...

  • Page 1055

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1029[Example of using wild cards](Entered character string)(Group for which the search will be made)(a)“*”CNC programs having any name(b)“*ABC”CNC programs having names which endwith “ABC”(c)“ABC*”CNC programs having names whic...

  • Page 1056

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021030Press function key OFFSETSETTING to display or set tool compensation values andother data.This section describes how to display or set the following data:1. Tool offset value2. Settings3. Run time and part count4. Workpiece origin offset v...

  • Page 1057

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1031Tool offset values, tool length offset values, and cutter compensationvalues are specified by D codes or H codes in a program. Compensationvalues corresponding to D codes or H codes are displayed or set on thescreen.Procedure for setting ...

  • Page 1058

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/0210323Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or changed usingpage keys and cursor keys, or enter the compensation number for thecompensation value to be set or changed and press soft key[NO.SRH].4To set a compensation value, enter ...

  • Page 1059

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1033OFFSETNO.DATANO.DATA 001 0.000 017 0.000 002 0.000 018 0.000 003 0.000 019 0.000 004 0.000 020 0.000 005 0.000 021 0.000 006 0.000 022 0.000 007 0.000 023 0.000 008 0.000 024 0.000 009 0.000 025 0.000 010 0.000 026 0.000 011 0.000 027 0.00...

  • Page 1060

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021034The length of the tool can be measured and registered as the tool lengthoffset value by moving the reference tool and the tool to be measured untilthey touch the specified position on the machine. The tool length can be measured along the...

  • Page 1061

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10358Press the soft key [INP.C.]. The Z axis relative coordinate value isinput and displayed as an tool length offset value.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇA prefixed positionReferencetoolThe difference is set as a toollength offset valueIN...

  • Page 1062

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021036Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting datascreen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/disable parameterwriting, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence numbers inprogram editing, and perfo...

  • Page 1063

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10374Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys , , , or .5Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT].Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled.0 : Disabled1 : EnabledSetting to perform TV check.0 : ...

  • Page 1064

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021038If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the programbeing executed, operation enters single block mode after the block isexecuted.Procedure for sequence number comparison and stop1Select the MDI mode.2Press function key...

  • Page 1065

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1039After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of theprogram, the sequence number set for sequence number compensationand stop is decremented by one. When the power is turned on, the settingof the sequence number is 0.I...

  • Page 1066

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021040Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of partsrequired, and number of machined parts can be displayed. This data canbe set by parameters or on this screen (except for the total number ofmachined parts and the time ...

  • Page 1067

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1041This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specifiedby parameter 6710 is executed. The value can also be set by parameter6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches the number of partsrequired. Refer to the m...

  • Page 1068

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021042Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinatesystem (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1P300) and external workpiece origin offset. The workpiece origin offsetand external workpiece origin offset c...

  • Page 1069

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1043This function is used to compensate for the difference between theprogrammed workpiece coordinate system and the actual workpiececoordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiececoordinate system can be input on the s...

  • Page 1070

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/0210445To display the workpiece origin offset setting screen, press thechapter selection soft key [WORK]. NO. DATA NO. DATA 00X0.00002 X0.000 (EXT) Y0.000(G55) Y0.000 Z0.000Z0.000 01X0.00003 X0.000 (G54) Y0.000(G...

  • Page 1071

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1045Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to#531 or #500 to #999) on the CRT. When the absolute value for a commonvariable exceeds 99999999, ******** is displayed. The values forvariables can be set on this screen...

  • Page 1072

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021046This subsection uses an example to describe how to display or setmachining menus (pattern menus) created by the machine tool builder.Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for the actualpattern menus and pattern data. See ...

  • Page 1073

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10474Enter necessary pattern data and press INPUT.5After entering all necessary data, enter the MEMORY mode and pressthe cycle start button to start machining.HOLE PATTERN : Menu titleAn optional character string can be displayed within 12 ch...

  • Page 1074

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021048With this function, functions of the switches on the machine operator’spanel can be controlled from the CRT/MDI panel.Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys.Procedure for displaying and setting the software operator’s panel1Press...

  • Page 1075

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10494Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or .5Push the cursor move key or to match the markJ to anarbitrary position and set the desired condition.6Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press th...

  • Page 1076

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021050Tool life data can be displayed to inform the operator of the current stateof tool life management. Groups which require tool changes are alsodisplayed.The tool life counter for each group can be preset to an arbitraryvalue. Tool data (e...

  • Page 1077

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10515To display the page containing the data for a group, enter the groupnumber and press soft key [NO.SRH].The cursor can be moved to an arbitrary group by pressing cursor key or .6To change the value in the life counter for a group, move th...

  • Page 1078

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021052TOOL LIFE DATA : O3000 N00060 SELECTED GROUP 000GROUP 001 :LIFE 0150 COUNT 00070034007800120056009000350026006100000000000000000000000000000000GROUP 002 :LIFE 1400 COUNT 00000062002400440074000000000...

  • Page 1079

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1053The extended tool life management function provides more detailed datadisplay and more data editing functions than the ordinary tool lifemanagement function.Moreover, if the tool life is specified in units of time, the time which hasbeen s...

  • Page 1080

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021054⋅ Deleting a tool group :7–4⋅ Deleting tool data (T, H, or D code) :7–5⋅ Skipping a tool :7–6⋅ Clearing the life count (resetting the life) :7–77–1Setting the life count type, life value, current life count, and tooldata ...

  • Page 1081

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10557–4Deleting a tool group(1) In step 3, position the cusor on a group to be deleted and display theediting screen.(2) Press soft key [DELETE].(3) Press soft key [GROUP].(4) Press soft key [EXEC].7–5Deleting tool data (T, H, or D code)(1...

  • Page 1082

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021056LIFE DATA EDIT GROUP : 001 O0010 N00001 TYPE: 1 (1:C 2:M)NEXT GROUP: *** LIFE: 9800USE GROUP : *** COUNT : 6501SELECTED GROUP : 001NO.STATET–CODEH–CODED–CODE01*003401100502#007800003303@001200401804*00560000000500900000000...

  • Page 1083

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1057When the extended tool life management function is provided, thefollowing items are added to the tool life management screen:S NEXT: Tool group to be used nextS USE: Tool group in useS Life counter type for each tool group (C: Cycles, M...

  • Page 1084

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021058Chopping data, including the reference point (R point), upper dead point,lower dead point, and chopping feedrate, can be displayed and set byusing the chopping screen.Procedure for displaying and setting chopping data1Press the OFFSETSETTI...

  • Page 1085

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1059If bit 7 (CHPX) of parameter No. 8360 is set to 1, the chopping feedratecannot be set by using the chopping screen.The chopping screen can be used to set chopping data regardless of thecurrent mode, even during automatic or manual operatio...

  • Page 1086

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021060OFFSET01234 N12345No. GEOMETRY (MACHINE)001100.000X–12345.678002200.000Y–12345.678003300.000Z–12345.678004400.000A–12345.678005500.000B–12345.678006600.000C–12345.678007700.000U–12345.678008800.000V–12345.678009900.000(T)1...

  • Page 1087

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1061NOTEPressing thekey resets the displayed T and Maddresses to 0. Once MEM or MDI mode has beenselected, however, the modal T and M codes are displayed.RESET4Use the numeric keys to enter the distance from the base measurementsurface to the...

  • Page 1088

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021062In general, the tool length offset value can be defined in either of thefollowing two ways. Both methods are based on the same concept: Thedifference between the tip position of the tool and that of a reference toolis used as the tool of...

  • Page 1089

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1063WorkpieceMeasurementsurfaceOFSLTool01OFSLToolT01HmZmZmL!HmReference blockBase measure-ment surfaceL: Distance from the reference tool tip position to the base measurement surface (machine coordinate of the measurement surface)Hm: Distance ...

  • Page 1090

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021064(2) Definition 2In the second definition method, the tool length offset is the distancefrom the tool tip position to the workpiece coordinate system originwhen the machine is positioned to the Z–axis zero point. A tool lengthoffset defi...

  • Page 1091

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1065The base measurement surface for this definition is located at theworkpiece coordinate system origin. Because the tip of the referencetool is also located at the workpiece coordinate system origin, distanceL from the reference tool tip po...

  • Page 1092

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021066The reference tool for definition 2 has a tip at the workpiece coordinatesystem origin when the machine is positioned to the Z–axis zero point.Whenever the workpiece is changed, therefore, the tool length offsetmust be remeasured. Remea...

  • Page 1093

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1067Procedure for measuring the workpiece origin offsetIn addition to the workpiece origin offset along the tool lengthwise axis,that is, the Z–axis, the workpiece origin offsets along the X– and Y–axes,on a plane perpendicular to the Z...

  • Page 1094

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021068To set the workpiece origin on other than the workpiece top surface(for example, when the origin is shifted from the workpiece topsurface by an amount equal to the cutting allowance), enter theamount of shift (S in the following figure) us...

  • Page 1095

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA10696As soon as the sensor detects contact with the circumference, input askip signal to the machine, thus stopping the axial movement ofmanual handle feed or jog feed. Simultaneously, the position atwhich feed stopped is stored as the first ...

  • Page 1096

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021070Workpiece (G55)ToolMachine zeropointOFSLOFSWG54ZmG54Workpieceorigin (G55)(G54)Workpiece (G54)OFSL: Tool length offset for the tool used to measure the workpiece origin offset ZmG54: Amount of movement from the machine zero point to the...

  • Page 1097

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1071(2) Definition 2The tool length offset in definition 2 equals the Z–axis workpieceorigin offset, as described above. Usually in this case, therefore, theworkpiece origin offset need not be set. If, however, the workpiece ischanged afte...

  • Page 1098

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021072The X– and Y–axis workpiece origin offsets can be measured regardlessof whether the workpiece origin is located on a surface of the workpieceor at the center of a hole to be machined.(1) When the workpiece origin is located on a surfac...

  • Page 1099

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1073+Z+XToolWorkpieceOFSWOFSR: Cutter compensation value for the tool used to measure the workpiece origin offset Xm: Amount of movement from the machine zero point to the workpiece origin when measured with a tool having a length of OFSROFSW...

  • Page 1100

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021074(2) When the workpiece origin is located at the center of a hole.Y–axis workpieceorigin offsetMachinezero pointX–axis workpiece origin offset+Y+XWorkpieceoriginIn the above case, the workpiece origin is located at the center of a holei...

  • Page 1101

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1075A measurement probe, fitted with a sensor, can also be used to measurethe Z–axis workpiece origin offset or measure the X–/Y–axis workpieceorigin offset based on a surface, in the same way as when measuring theX–/Y–axis workpiece...

  • Page 1102

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021076Procedure for displaying the fixture offset screen and setting data on the screen1Press function key OFFSETSETTING.2Press continuous menu key several times until [F–OFS]appears.3Press soft key [F–OFS].The following fixture offset scre...

  • Page 1103

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1077When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set todetermine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fullyutilize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts.This chapter describes how to set par...

  • Page 1104

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021078S Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys, PAGE and PAGE , and cursor keys, , , , and .5To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and presssoft key [INPUT]. The parameter is set to the entered value a...

  • Page 1105

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1079Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and onagain after they are set. Setting such parameters causes P/S alarm 000.In this case, turn off the power, then turn it on again.Refer to the Parameter Manual (B–63530E...

  • Page 1106

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021080D Number of the pitch error compensation point having the largest value(for each axis): Parameter 3622D Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis): Parameter3623D Interval of the pitch error compensation points (for each axis...

  • Page 1107

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1081D Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end(for travel in the positive direction, for each axis): Parameter 3621D Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end(for travel in the negative direction...

  • Page 1108

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021082The program number, sequence number, and current CNC status arealways displayed on the screen except when the power is turned on, asystem alarm occurs, or the PMC screen is displayed.If data setting or the input/output operation is incorre...

  • Page 1109

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1083The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and programediting state are displayed on the next to last line on the screen allowingthe operator to readily understand the operation condition of the system.If data setting or the...

  • Page 1110

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021084––EMG––:: Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.)––RESET––: Indicates that the reset signal is being received.ALM: Indicates that an alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)BAT: Indicates that the batt...

  • Page 1111

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1085By pressing the function key MESSAGE, data such as alarms, alarm historydata, and external messages can be displayed.For information relating to alarm display, see Section III.7.1. Forinformation relating to alarm history display, see Se...

  • Page 1112

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021086To clear external operator message history data, press the [CLEAR] softkey. This clears all external operator message history data. (Set MSGCR(bit 0 of parameter No. 3113) to 1.)Note that when MS1 and MS0 (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No. 3...

  • Page 1113

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1087When screen indication isn’t necessary, the life of the back light for LCDcan be put off by turning off the back light.The screen can be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible tospecify the automatic clearing of the scre...

  • Page 1114

    OPERATION11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATAB–63534EN/021088The CNC screen is automatically cleared if no keys are pressed during theperiod (in minutes) specified with a parameter. The screen is restored bypressing any key.Procedure for automatic erase screen displayThe CNC screen is cleared once ...

  • Page 1115

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA1089Automatic erase screen display function can not be used with the160i/180i/160is/180is.D Limitations

  • Page 1116

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02109012 GRAPHICS FUNCTIONTwo graphic functions are available. One is a graphic display function,and the other is a dynamic graphic display function.The graphic display function can draw the tool path specified by aprogram being executed on a screen. Th...

  • Page 1117

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1091It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the screen, whichmakes it possible to check the progress of machining, while observing thepath on the screen.In addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen.Before drawing, graphic par...

  • Page 1118

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/0210926Automatic operation is started and machine movement is drawn onthe screen.MEM **********14 : 23 : 03000100012GRAPHPARAMZXYS 0TX 0.000Y 0.000Z 0.000The size of the graphic screen will be as follows:Gc : Center of the screenN...

  • Page 1119

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1093Set the center of the graphic range to the center of the screen. If thedrawing range in the program can be contained in the above actualgraphics range, set the magnification to 1 (actual value set is 100).When the drawing range is larger than the m...

  • Page 1120

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021094When the actual tool path is not near the center of the screen, method 1will cause the tool path to be drawn out of the geaphics range if graphicsmagnification is not set properly.To avoid such cases, the following six graphic parameters are prepare...

  • Page 1121

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1095⋅ AXESSpecify the plane to use for drawing. The user can choose from thefollowing six coordinate systems.With two–path control, a different drawing coordinate system can beselected for each tool post.YZXXXXYYZZZZYY(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)= 0 : Sele...

  • Page 1122

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021096⋅ GRAPHIC CENTERX=Y=Z=Set the coordinate value on the workpiece coordinate system atgraphic center.NOTE1 When MAX. and MIN. of RANGE are set, the values will beset automatically once drawing is executed2 When setting the graphics range with the gr...

  • Page 1123

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1097There are the following two functions in Dynamic Graphics.Path graphicSolid graphicThis is used to draw the path of tool center com-manded by the part program.This is used to draw the workpiece figure machined bytool movement commanded by the part p...

  • Page 1124

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021098Coordinate axes and actual size dimension lines are displayed togetherwith the drawing so that actual size can be referenced.The first six functions above (1. to 6.) are available by setting the graphicparameters. The seventh to ninth functions (7....

  • Page 1125

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION10992There are two screens for setting drawing parameters.Press the page key according to the setting items for selectingscreens.3Set the cursor to an item to be set by cursor keys.4Input numerics by numeric keys.5Press the INPUT key.The input numerics ...

  • Page 1126

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02110011For partial drawing enlargement, display the PATH GRAPHIC(SCALE) screen by pressing the soft key [ZOOM] on the PATHGRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen of step 1 above. The tool path isdisplayed. Next, press soft key [(OPRT)].MEM **********10 : 10 : 40PAT...

  • Page 1127

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION110115To display a mark at the current tool position, display the PATHGRAPHIC (POSITION) screen by pressing soft key [POS] on thePATH GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen of step 1 above. Thismark blinks at the current tool center position on the tool path.14 : ...

  • Page 1128

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021102Projector view by isometric can be drawn.YXYZXZYZXYXZP=4P=5Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Coordinate systems for the isometric projectionXYZXP=6Fig. 12.2.1 (b) Coordinate systems for the biplane viewBiplanes (XY and XZ) can be drawn simultaneously. The maximum a...

  • Page 1129

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1103The tilting angle of the vertical axis is set in the range of –90°to +90°inreference to the horizontal axis crossing the vertical axis at a right angle.When a positive value is set, the vertical axis slants to the other side ofthe graphic screen...

  • Page 1130

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021104It is possible to set whether the tool path is drawn by making the toollength offset or cutter compensation valid or invalid.Setting valueTool length offset or cutter compensation0Perform drawing by making tool compensation valid(An actual tool pat...

  • Page 1131

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1105No part program which has not been registered in memory can be drawn.Also, it is necessary that the M02 or M30 should be commanded at theend of the part program.The period of mark blinking is short when the tool is moving and becomeslonger when the...

  • Page 1132

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021106The solid graphics draws the figure of a workpieces machined by themovement of a tool.The following graphic functions are provided :Solid model graphic is drawn by surfaces so that the machined figure canbe recognized concretely.It is possible to dr...

  • Page 1133

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1107Solid graphics drawing procedure1To draw a machining profile, necessary data must be set beforehand.So press the function key GRAPH ( CUSTOM GRAPH for the small MDI).The screen of ”SOLID GRAPHIC (PARAMETER)” is displayed.SOLID GRAPHIC (PARAMETER...

  • Page 1134

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/0211086Press soft key [ANEW]. This allows the blank figure drawing to beperformed based on the blank figure data set.7Press soft keys [+ROT] [–ROT] [+TILT], and [–TILT], whenperforming drawing by changing the drawing directions. ParametersP and Q fo...

  • Page 1135

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION110910Press soft key [(OPRT)] and press either soft key [A.ST] or [F.ST].When [A.ST] is pressed, the status of machining in progress is drawnby simulation. When [F.ST] is pressed, the profile during machiningis not drawn. Only the finished profile pro...

  • Page 1136

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/02111015To redraw the figure in a different mode, press soft key [+ROT],[–ROT], [+TILT], or [–TILT]. Parameters P and Q for the drawingdirection are changed and the figure is redrawn with the newparamaters.16The machined figure can be drawn on the tri...

  • Page 1137

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1111Set the type of blank figure under P. The relationship between the settingvalue and figure is as follows:PBlank figure0Rectangular parallelepiped (Cubed)1Column or cylinder (parallel to Z–axis)Set the X–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis coordinate ...

  • Page 1138

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021112Set the machining direction of tools.PMachining direction of tools0,1Parallel to the Z–axis (perform machining from the + direction)Set the dimensions of tool. The relationship between the displayedaddress and setting value is as shown below:Addr...

  • Page 1139

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1113Specify the intensity of the drawing screen when performing drawing onthe monochrome, and the color of the drawing screen when performingdrawing on the color screen. The relationship between the setting,intensity, and color is as shown below:Howeve...

  • Page 1140

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021114Specify the start sequence number and end sequence number of eachdrawing in a five–digit numeric. The subject part program is executedfrom the head. But only the part enclosed by the start sequence numberand end sequence numeric is drawn. When ...

  • Page 1141

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1115In solid graphics, parameter 6501 (TLC, bit 1) is used to specify whetherto apply tool length offset.Parameter 6501 (3PL, bit 2) is used to select whether to draw a triplaneview with the third–angle or first–angle projection.Parameter 6501 (RID,...

  • Page 1142

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021116Right view and rear view[ ]Rear view and left viewFront view and right viewLeft view and front view[ ][ ][ ]Rear viewTop viewRight side viewLeft side viewFront viewExample) The side views of the figure be...

  • Page 1143

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1117Some examples of cross–sectional views are given below for the left viewand front view shown on the previous page.ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕSectional view 1ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕSection...

  • Page 1144

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021118The background drawing function enables the drawing of a figure for oneprogram while machining a workpiece under the control of anotherprogram.Procedure for Background Drawing1Press the GRAPH function key ( CUSTOM GRAPH for a small MDI).2 Press the...

  • Page 1145

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION1119Separate tool offsets are internally provided for machining andbackground drawing. Upon starting drawing or when selecting a programfor drawing, the tool offset data for machining is copied to the tool offsetdata for background drawing. Changing a...

  • Page 1146

    OPERATION12. GRAPHICS FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021120Bit 5 (DPO) of parameter No. 6500 can be used to specify whether thecoordinates of the current position are to be displayed on the tool pathdrawing.In background drawing mode, modal information F, S, and T is displayed,together with the current posi...

  • Page 1147

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0213. HELP FUNCTION112113 HELP FUNCTIONThe help function displays on the screen detailed information aboutalarms issued in the CNC and about CNC operations. The followinginformation is displayed.When the CNC is operated incorrectly or an erroneous machiningprogram is execute...

  • Page 1148

    OPERATION13. HELP FUNCTIONB–63534EN/0211222Press soft key [ALM] on the HELP (INITIAL MENU) screen to displaydetailed information about an alarm currently beingraised..HELP (ALARM DETAIL)O0010 N00001NUMBER : 027M‘SAGE : NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44FUNCTION : TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION ...

  • Page 1149

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0213. HELP FUNCTION11233To get details on another alarm number, first enter the alarm number,then press soft key [SELECT]. This operation is useful forinvestigating alarms not currently being raised.Fig. 13 (d) How to select each ALARM DETAILS>100S 0 T0000MEM **** **...

  • Page 1150

    OPERATION13. HELP FUNCTIONB–63534EN/021124Fig. 13 (g) How to select each OPERATION METHOD screen>1S 0 T0000MEM **** *** ***10:12:25[ ][ ][ ][ ][ SELECT ]When “1. PROGRAM EDIT” is selected, for example, the screen inFigure 13 (g) is displayed.On each OPERATI...

  • Page 1151

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0213. HELP FUNCTION1125HELP (PARAMETER TABLE)01234 N000011/4* SETTEING(No. 0000∼)* READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE(No. 0100∼)* AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT(No. 1000∼)* COORDINATE SYSTEM(No. 1200∼)* STROKE LIMIT(No. 1300∼)* FEED RATE(No. 1400∼)* ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL(No. ...

  • Page 1152

    OPERATION14. SCREEN HARDCOPYB–63534EN/02112614 SCREEN HARDCOPYThe screen hardcopy function outputs the information displayed on theCNC screen as 640*480–dot bitmap data. This function makes it possibleto produce a hard copy of a still image displayed on the CNC.The created bitmap data can be...

  • Page 1153

    OPERATIONB–63534EN/0214. SCREEN HARDCOPY1127NOTE1 During the screen hardcopy operation, key input is disabledfor several tens of seconds. Until the screen hardcopyoperation ends, the screen image lies still. During thisperiod, the hardcopy in progress signal <F061#3> is tied to1. No ot...

  • Page 1154

    OPERATION14. SCREEN HARDCOPYB–63534EN/021128The number of colors used in created bitmap data depend on the displaycontrol card, the LCD hardware, and the display mode of the CNC screen.Table 14 (a) indicates the relationships.Table 14 (a) Colors of BMP data created by the screen hardcopy funct...

  • Page 1155

    IV. MAINTENANCE

  • Page 1156

  • Page 1157

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY11311 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYThis chapter describes how to replace the CNC backup battery andabsolute pulse coder battery. This chapter consists of the followingsections:1.1 REPLACING BATTERY FOR LCD–MOUNTED TYPE iSERIES1.2 REPLACING T...

  • Page 1158

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/021132When a lithium battery is usedPrepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B–0200–K102(FANUC specification: A98L–0031–0012)).1) Turn on the power to the CNC. After about 30 seconds, turn off thepower.2) Remove the old battery...

  • Page 1159

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1133CAUTIONSteps 1) to 3) should be completed within 30 minutes. Donot leave the control unit without a battery for any longerthan the specified period. Otherwise, the contents ofmemory may be lost.If steps 1) to 3) may not be completed wit...

  • Page 1160

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/0211341) Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available.2) Turn on the power to the Series 16i/18i/160i/180i.3) Remove the battery case cover.4) Replace the cells, paying careful attention to their orientation.5) Reinstall the c...

  • Page 1161

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1135If a lithium battery is used, have A02B–0200–K102 (FANUC internalcode: A98L–0031–0012) handy.(1) Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off.(2) Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unit.Disconnect the c...

  • Page 1162

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/021136CAUTIONComplete steps (1) to (3) within 30 minutes.If the battery is left removed for a long time, the memorywould lose the contents.If there is a danger that the replacement cannot becompleted within 30 minutes, save the whole contents o...

  • Page 1163

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1137(1) Have commercial D–size alkaline dry cells handy.(2) Turn the CNC on.(3) Remove the lid from the battery case.(4) Replace the old dry cells with new ones. Mount the dry cells in acorrect orientation.(5) Replace the lid on the batter...

  • Page 1164

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/021138A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the CNC display unitwith PC functions. This battery is factory–set in the CNC display unitwith PC functions. This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOSdata for one year.When t...

  • Page 1165

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1139Lithium batteryA02B–0200–K102Battery holderConnector(BAT1)Fig. 1.3 Lithium battery connection for CNC display unit with PC functions

  • Page 1166

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/021140One battery unit can maintain current position data for six absolute pulsecoders for a year.When the voltage of the battery becomes low, APC alarms 306 to 308 (+axis name) are displayed on the CRT display. When APC alarm 3n7 isdisplayed,...

  • Page 1167

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1141When the battery voltage falls, APC alarms 306 to 308 are displayed onthe screen. When APC alarm 307 is displayed, replace the battery as soonas possible. In general, the battery should be replaced within one or twoweeks of the alarm firs...

  • Page 1168

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/021142– The service life of the batteries is about two years if they are used ina six–axis configuration with ai series servo motors and one year ifthey are used in a six–axis configuration with a series servo motors.FANUC recommends that...

  • Page 1169

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1143– The absolute pulse coder of the ai series servo motor is incorporatedwith a backup capacitor as standard. This backup capacitor enables anabsolute position detection to be continued for about 10 minutes.Therefore, no zero point return...

  • Page 1170

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/021144[Installation procedure for the battery](1) Remove the battery cover from the SVM.(2) Install the battery in the SVM as shown in the figure below.(3) Install the battery cover.(4) Attach the battery connector to CX5X of the SVM.BatterySVM...

  • Page 1171

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1145WARNING1 When replacing the battery, be careful not to touch baremetal parts in the panel. In particular, be careful not to touchany high–voltage circuits due to the electric shock hazard.2 Before replacing the battery, check that the ...

  • Page 1172

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/021146(2) Detaching the connector<1>Hold both the sides of the cable insulatorand the cable, and pull them horizontally.<2>10 degrees or lessPull out the cable side while raising it slightly.<3>5 degrees or lessHere, the angle...

  • Page 1173

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1147The battery is connected in either of 2 ways as follows.Method 1: Use the battery case (A06B–6050–K060).Use the battery: A06B–6050–K061 or D–size alkaline battery.Method 2: Attach the lithium battery to the SVM.Use the battery: ...

  • Page 1174

    MAINTENANCE1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERYB–63534EN/021148(5) Remove the battery from the servo unit.(6) Replace the battery and connect the battery cable with theconnector CX5X or CX5Y of the servo unit.(7) Mount the battery cover.SVU–12, SVU–20BatteryBattery coverPass the battery cable to ...

  • Page 1175

    MAINTENANCEB–63534EN/021. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY1149Old batteries should be disposed as “INDUSTRIAL WASTES”according to the regulations of the country or autonomy where yourmachine has been installed.Used batteries

  • Page 1176

  • Page 1177

    APPENDIX

  • Page 1178

  • Page 1179

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02A. TAPE CODE LIST1153ATAPE CODE LISTISO codeEIA codeMeaningCharacter 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 43 2 1WithoutCUSTOMMACURO BWithCUSTOMMACRO B0f ff0ffNumber 01ff fff1ff Number 12ff fff2ffNumber 23f fff f3fff f Number 34ff fff4ffNumber 45f ffff5ffff Number 56f fff f6fff f...

  • Page 1180

    APPENDIXA. TAPE CODE LISTB–63534EN/021154ISO codeEIA codeMeaningCharacter 8 7 6 5 43 2 1Character8 7 6 5 43 2 1WithoutCUSTOMMACROBWithCUSTOMMACROBDELf f f f f ff f fDelf f f f ff f f Delete (deleting a mispunch)××NULfBlankfNo punch. With EIAcode, this code cannotbe used in a significantinfor...

  • Page 1181

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02A. TAPE CODE LIST1155NOTE1 The symbols used in the remark column have the following meanings.(Space) :The character will be registered in memory and has a specific meaning.It it is used incorrectly in a statement other than a comment, an alarm occurs.×:The character will no...

  • Page 1182

    APPENDIXB. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMATB–63534EN/021156BLIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMATSome functions cannot be added as options depending on the model.In the tables below, PI:presents a combination of arbitrary axisaddresses using X,Y,Z,A,B and C (such as X_Y_Z_A_).x = 1st basic axis (X...

  • Page 1183

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT1157FunctionsIllustrationTape formatG04X_;Dwell (G04)P_High–speed cycle machining (G05)G05 P10_L_; P10_:Number of the machining cycle to be called first:(P10001 to P10999) L_:Repetition count of the machining cycle(L1 to L999/L1 applies ...

  • Page 1184

    APPENDIXB. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMATB–63534EN/021158FunctionsIllustrationTape formatVelocityTimeExact stop (G09)Change of offsetvalue by program(G10)PI _;G09G02G03G01YpXp(x y)G17 G16 Xp_ Yp_ ;. . . G18 G16 Zp_ Xp_;. . . G19 G16 Yp_ Zp_;. . . G15 ; CancelXpYpLocal coordinateWork coordin...

  • Page 1185

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT1159FunctionsIllustrationTape format(XYZ)(IJK)Stored stroke check(G22, G23)G22 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_;G23 Cancel;Reference position return check (G27)G27 _ ;PIPIReference position return(G28)2nd, reference position re-turn (G30)G28 _ ;PIPIG30 ...

  • Page 1186

    APPENDIXB. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMATB–63534EN/021160ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇCutter compensation C (G40 – G42)ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇG41G42G17G18G19G41G42D_ ;Tool length offset A (G43, G44, G49)G43Z_ H_ ;ZOffsetG44G43H_ ;G44H : Tool offsetG49 : CancelTool length offset B (G43, ...

  • Page 1187

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT1161FunctionsIllustrationTape formatvtG64vG61tCutting mode/Exactstop mode, Tappingmode, Automaticcorner overrideOne–shot call G65 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ; P : Program No. L : Number of repeatitionModal call G66 G67 ; ...

  • Page 1188

    APPENDIXB. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMATB–63534EN/021162Absolute/incremental programming (G90/G91)G90_ ;Absolute commandG91_ ;Incremental commandG90_ G91_ ;Combined useChange of workpiece coordinate system (G92)Maximum spindle speed clamp (G92)ÇÇÇÇPIG92 _ ; Change of workpiece coordi...

  • Page 1189

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE1163CRANGEOFCOMMANDVALUEIncrement systemIS–BIS–CLeast input increment0.001 mm0.0001 mmLeast command increment0.001 mm0.0001 mmMax. programmable dimension±99999.999 mm±9999.9999 mmMax. rapid traverse Note240000 mm/min100000 mm/minFeedrate range...

  • Page 1190

    APPENDIXC. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUEB–63534EN/021164Increment systemIS–BIS–CLeast input increment0.0001 inch0.00001 inchLeast command increment0.0001 inch0.00001 inchMax. programmable dimension±9999.9999 inch±9999.9999 inchMax. rapid traverse Note9600 inch/min4000 inch/minFeedrate range No...

  • Page 1191

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE1165Increment systemIS–BIS–CLeast input increment0.001 deg0.0001 degLeast command increment0.001 deg0.0001 degMax. programmable dimension±99999.999 deg±9999.9999 degMax. rapid traverse Note240000 deg/min100000 deg/minFeedrate range Note1 to 240...

  • Page 1192

    APPENDIXD. NOMOGRAPHSB–63534EN/021166DNOMOGRAPHS

  • Page 1193

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02D. NOMOGRAPHS1167The leads of a thread are generally incorrect in δ1 and δ2, as shown in Fig.D.1 (a), due to automatic acceleration and deceleration.Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of δ1 and δ2 in theprogram.Fig. D.1 (a) Incorrect thread position...

  • Page 1194

    APPENDIXD. NOMOGRAPHSB–63534EN/021168First specify the class and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy, α,will be obtained at (1), and depending on the time constant of cutting feedacceleration/ deceleration, the δ1 value when V = 10mm / s will beobtained at (2). Then, depending on the ...

  • Page 1195

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02D. NOMOGRAPHS1169Fig. D.2 (a) Incorrect threaded portionδ2δ1R : Spindle speed (min–1)L : Thread lead (mm)* When time constant T of the servo system is 0.033 s.d2+ LR1800 * (mm)d1+ LR1800 *(–1–lna)+ d2(–1–lna)Following a is a permited value of thread.a–1–lna...

  • Page 1196

    APPENDIXD. NOMOGRAPHSB–63534EN/021170Fig. D.2 (b) Nomograph for obtaining approach distance δ1D Reference

  • Page 1197

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02D. NOMOGRAPHS1171When servo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration atcutting or caused by the positioning system when a servo motor is used)is accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between thetool path (tool center path) and the programmed ...

  • Page 1198

    APPENDIXD. NOMOGRAPHSB–63534EN/021172The tool path shown in Fig. D.3 (b) is analyzed based on the followingconditions:Feedrate is constant at both blocks before and after cornering.The controller has a buffer register. (The error differs with the readingspeed of the tape reader, number of char...

  • Page 1199

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02D. NOMOGRAPHS1173Fig. D.3 (c) Initial valueY0X0V0The initial value when cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinatesat the end of command distribution by the controller, is determined by thefeedrate and the positioning system time constant of the servo motor.X0+ VX1(T...

  • Page 1200

    APPENDIXD. NOMOGRAPHSB–63534EN/021174When a servo motor is used, the positioning system causes an errorbetween input commands and output results. Since the tool advancesalong the specified segment, an error is not produced in linearinterpolation. In circular interpolation, however, radial error...

  • Page 1201

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02E. STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON,WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET1175E STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEARAND WHEN RESETParameter CLR (No. 3402#6) is used to select whether resetting the CNCplaces it in the cleared state or in the reset state (0: reset state/1: clearedstate).Th...

  • Page 1202

    APPENDIXE. STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON,WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESETB–63534EN/021176ItemResetClearedWhen turning power onAction in Movement×××opera-Dwell×××tionIssuance of M, S andT codes×××Tool length compensa-tion×Depending onparameterLVK(No.5003#6)f : MDI modeOther modes dependon para...

  • Page 1203

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02F. CHARACTER–TO–CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE1177F CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLEChar-acterCodeCommentChar-acterCodeCommentA0656054B0667055C0678056D0689057E069032SpaceF070!033Exclamation markG071”034Quotation markH072#035Hash signI073$036Dollar signJ074%037Percen...

  • Page 1204

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021178GALARM LIST1) Program errors (P/S alarm)NumberMessageContents000PLEASE TURN OFF POWERA parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power.001TH PARITY ALARMTH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape.002TV PARITY AL...

  • Page 1205

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1179NumberContentsMessage029ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUEThe offset values specified by H code is too large.Modify the program.030ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBERThe offset values specified by D/H code for tool length offset, cutter com-pensation or 3–dimensional cutter compensat...

  • Page 1206

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021180NumberContentsMessage053TOO MANY ADDRESS COM-MANDSFor systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting,a comma was specified. For systems with this feature, a comma was fol-lowed by something other than R or C Correct the program.055MISSING...

  • Page 1207

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1181NumberContentsMessage085COMMUNICATION ERRORWhen entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bitsof input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is in-...

  • Page 1208

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021182NumberContentsMessage109FORMAT ERROR IN G08A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P in the G08 code, or novalue was specified.110DATA OVERFLOWThe absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the al-lowable range. Modify the program.111CA...

  • Page 1209

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1183NumberContentsMessage131TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARMMESSAGESFive or more alarms have generated in external alarm message. Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause.132ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUNDNo alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear.Check...

  • Page 1210

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021184NumberContentsMessage156P/L COMMAND NOT FOUNDP and L commands are missing at the head of program in which thetool group is set. Correct the program.157TOO MANY TOOL GROUPSThe number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maximum allowablevalue. See parameter G...

  • Page 1211

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1185NumberContentsMessage185RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT(gear hobbing machine)G81 was instructed without performing reference position return afterpower on or emergency stop. (hobbing machine) Perform referenceposition return.186PARAMETER SETTING ERROR(gear hobbin...

  • Page 1212

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021186NumberContentsMessage214ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYN-CHRO–MODECoordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type isexecuted in the synchronous control. Correct the program.222DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG.–EDITInput and output are executed at a time i...

  • Page 1213

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1187NumberContentsMessage251ATC ERRORAn error occurs in the following cases (Only for the ROBODRILL) : When unusable T code is specified in M06 T_ When the M06 code is specified when the Z coordinate is positivein the machine coordinate system. When parameter No...

  • Page 1214

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021188NumberContentsMessage5044G68 FORMAT ERRORThe G68 block contains a format error. This alarm occurs in the fol-lowing cases:1One of I, J, and K is not specified in the G68 block (missing optionfor coordinate conversion).2I, J, and K are 0 in the G68 block.3R ...

  • Page 1215

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1189NumberContentsMessage5063IS NOT PRESET AFTER REF.This message is output when the position counter has not been preset before the start of plate thickness measurement. This alarm isissued in one of the cases below.1) When an attempt was made to perform measu...

  • Page 1216

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021190NumberContentsMessage5115SPL : ERRORThere is an error in the specification of the rank.No knot is specified.The knot specification has an error.The number of axes exceeds the limits.Other program errors5116SPL : ERRORThere is a program error in a block under...

  • Page 1217

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1191NumberContentsMessage5156ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION(SHPCC)In simple high–precision contour control (SHPCC) mode, the controlledaxis selection signal (PMC axis control) changes.In SHPCC mode, the simple synchronous axis selection signalchanges.5157PARAMETER ZE...

  • Page 1218

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021192NumberContentsMessage5227FILE NOT FOUNDA specified file is not found during communication with the built–inHandy File.5228SAME NAME USEDThere are duplicate file names in the built–in Handy File.5229WRITE PROTECTEDA floppy disk in the built–in Handy Fil...

  • Page 1219

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1193NumberContentsMessage5307INTERNAL DATA OVER FLOWIn the following function, internal data exceeds the allowable range.1) Improvement of the rotation axis feedrate5311FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTIONA connection related to FSSB is illegal.This alarm is issued when eith...

  • Page 1220

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021194NumberContentsMessage5413NURBS:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMANDAn axis not specified with controlled points is specified in the first block.5414NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOTThe number of blocks containing knots only is insufficient.5415NURBS:ILLEGAL CANCELAlthough NURBS interpolat...

  • Page 1221

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1195NumberContentsMessage5452IMPROPER G–CODE (5AXISMODE)A G code that cannot be specified is found. (5–axis mode)This alarm is issued when:1) Three–dimensional cutter compensation (side–face offset and lead-ing–edge offset) is applied during cutter co...

  • Page 1222

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/0211963) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarmNumberMessageContents300nth–axis origin returnManual reference position return is required for the nth–axis (n=1 to 8).301APC alarm: nth–axis communicationnth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC communication error. Failure in dat...

  • Page 1223

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1197No.DescriptionMessage368n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR(INT)Communication data from the built–in pulse coder cannot be re-ceived.369n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR(INT)A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data beingreceived from the built–in pulse...

  • Page 1224

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/0211986) Servo alarms (1/2)NumberMessageContents401SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDYOFFThe n–th axis (axis 1–8) servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off.Refer to procedure of trouble shooting.402SERVO ALARM: SV CARD NOT EX-ISTThe axis control card is not provi...

  • Page 1225

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1199NumberContentsMessage417SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – PA-RAMETER INCORRECTThis alarm occurs when the n–th axis (axis 1–8) is in one of the condi-tions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm)1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 (motor form) is out of...

  • Page 1226

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021200NumberContentsMessage439n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER1) PSM: The DC link voltage is too high.2) PSMR: The DC link voltage is too high.3)α series SVU: The C link voltage is too high.4)β series SVU: The link voltage is too high.440n AXIS : CNV. EX DECELER...

  • Page 1227

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1201NumberContentsMessage460n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECTFSSB communication was disconnected suddenly. The possiblecauses are as follows:1) The FSSB communication cable was disconnected or broken.2) The power to the amplifier was turned off suddenly.3) A low–volta...

  • Page 1228

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021202ALDEXPAlarm details10Built–in pulse coder disconnection (hardware)11Separately installed pulse coder disconnection(hardware)00Pulse coder is not connected due to software.#7204#6OFS#5MCC#4LDA#3PMS#2#1#0#6 (OFS) : A current conversion error has occured in t...

  • Page 1229

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST12038) Servo alarms (2/2)NumberMessageContents600n AXIS : INV. DC LINK OVER CUR-RENTDC link current is too large.601n AXIS : INV. RADIATOR FAN FAIL-UREThe external dissipator stirring fan failed.602n AXIS : INV. OVERHEATThe servo amplifier was overheated.603n AX...

  • Page 1230

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/02120411) Serial spindle alarmsNumberMessageContents749S–SPINDLE LSI ERRORIt is serial communication error while system is executing after powersupply on. Following reasons can be considered.1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable...

  • Page 1231

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1205NumberContentsMessage782SPINDLE–4 MODE CHANGE ER-RORSame as alarm number 752 (for the fourth spindle)784SPINDLE–4 ABNORMAL TORQUEALMSame as alarm number 754 (for the fourth spindle)#7409#6#5#4#3SPE#2S2E#1S1E#0SHE#3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control...

  • Page 1232

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021206Alarm List (Serial Spindle)When a serial spindle alarm occurs, the following number is displayed onthe CNC. n is a number corresponding to the spindle on which an alarmoccurs. (n = 1: First spindle; n = 2: Second spindle; etc.)NOTE*1Note that the meaning...

  • Page 1233

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1207No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message7n07SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED07Check for a sequence error. (For ex-ample, check whether spindle syn-chronization was specified when thespindle could not be turned.)The motor speed has exceeded115% ...

  • Page 1234

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021208No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message7n24SPN_n_ : SERIALTRANSFERERROR241 Place the CNC–to–spindle cableaway from the power cable.2 Replace the cable.The CNC power is turned off (normalpower–off or broken cable).An error is...

  • Page 1235

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1209No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message7n34SPN_n_ : PARAMETERSETTING ER-ROR34Correct a parameter value accordingto the manual.If the parameter number is unknown,connect the spindle check board, andcheck the indicated parameter.Par...

  • Page 1236

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021210No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message7n47SPN_n_ : POS–CODERSIGNAL AB-NORMAL471 Replace the cable.2Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal.3 Correct the cable layout (vicinity ofthe power line).1 The A/B phase signal of thespindle pos...

  • Page 1237

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1211No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message7n58SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD INPSM581 Check the PSM cooling status.2 Replace the PSM unit.The temperature of the radiator of thePSM has increased abnormally.(PSM alarm indication: 3)7n59SPN_n_ : CO...

  • Page 1238

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021212No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message7n97SPN_n_ : OTHERSPINDLEALARM97Replace the SPM.Another irregularity was detected.7n98SPN_n_ : OTHER CON-VERTERALARM98Check the PSM alarm display.A PSM alarm was detected.9n01SPN_n_ : MOTOR O...

  • Page 1239

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1213No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message9n11SPN_n_ : OVERVOLTPOW CIRCUIT111 Check the selected PSM.2 Check the input power voltage andchange in power during motor de-celeration. If the voltage exceeds253 VAC (for the 200–V syste...

  • Page 1240

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021214No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message9n29SPN_n_ : SHORTTIMEOVERLOAD29Check and correct the load status.Excessive load has been appliedcontinuously for a certain period oftime. (This alarm is issued also whenthe motor shaft has ...

  • Page 1241

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1215No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message9n42SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT.POS–CODERDETECT421 Replace the cable.2Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal.1 The 1–rotation signal of thespindle position coder (connectorJY4) is disconnected.2 The 1...

  • Page 1242

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021216No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message9n56SPN_n_ : INNER COOL-ING FAN STOP56Replace the SPM unit.The cooling fan in the SPM control cir-cuit stopped.9n57SPN_n_ : EX DECEL-ERATIONPOWER571 Decrease the acceleration/decel-eration du...

  • Page 1243

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1217No.DescriptionFaulty location and remedySPM in-dica-tion(*1)Message9n87SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN-SOR SIGNALERROR87The one–rotation signal of the spindlesensor is not generated.An irregularity was detected in aspindle sensor feedback signal.9n88SPN_n_ : COOLING RA...

  • Page 1244

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/021218ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE)NOTE*1Note that the meanings of the SPM indications differdepending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on.When the yellow LED is on, an error code is indicated witha 2–digit number. The error code is not displayed on theCN...

  • Page 1245

    APPENDIXB–63534EN/02G. ALARM LIST1219SPMindica-tion(*1)DescriptionFaulty location and remedy12During execution of the spindle synchronization com-mand, do not specify another operation mode. Beforeentering another mode, cancel the spindle synchroniza-tion command.Although spindle synchronizati...

  • Page 1246

    APPENDIXG. ALARM LISTB–63534EN/02122012) System alarms (These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)NumberMessageContents900ROM PARITYA parity error occurred in the CNC, macro, or servo ROM. Correctthe contents of the flash ROM having the displayed number.910SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0)A RAM parity...

  • Page 1247

    IndexB–63534EN/02i–1[Numbers]3–Dimensional Circular Interpolation, 6933–Dimensional Cutter Compensation, 6687.2″/8.4″ LCD–Mounted Type CNC Control Unit, 7198–Digit Program Number, 1829.5″/10.4″ LCD–Mounted Type CNC Control Unit,719[A]Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90...

  • Page 1248

    IndexB–63534EN/02i–2Coordinate System on Part Drawing and CoordinateSystem Specified by CNC – Coordinate System, 18Coordinate System Rotation (G68, G69), 367Coordinate Value and Dimension, 136Copying a Program Between Two Paths, 595Copying a Program between Two Paths, 970Copying an Entire P...

  • Page 1249

    B–63534EN/02Indexi–3DNC Operation, 797, 838DNC Operation with Memory Card, 837Drilling Cycle Counter Boring Cycle (G82), 198Drilling Cycle, Spot Drilling (G81), 196Dry Run, 849Dwell (G04), 114Dynamic Graphic Display, 1097[E]Editing a Part Program, 709Editing of Custom Macros, 966Editing Progr...

  • Page 1250

    IndexB–63534EN/02i–4Index Table Indexing Function, 261Input Command from MDI, 334Inputting a Program, 875Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files, 909Inputting and Outputting Offset Data, 906Inputting and Outputting Parameters, 904Inputting and Outputting Parameters and Pitch ErrorCompensation D...

  • Page 1251

    B–63534EN/02Indexi–5Operational Devices, 717Operations, 838Optional Angle Chamfering and Corner Rounding,243Outputting a Program, 878Outputting a Program List for a Specified Group , 896Outputting Custom Macro Common Variable, 887Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables, 908Outputting Offset ...

  • Page 1252

    IndexB–63534EN/02i–6Scaling (G50, G51), 362Scheduling Function, 809Screen Displayed at Power–on, 750Screen Hardcopy, 1126Screens Displayed by Function Key MESSAGE, 1085Screens Displayed by Function Key OFFSETSETTING, 1030Screens Displayed by Function key POS, 993Screens Displayed by Functio...

  • Page 1253

    B–63534EN/02Indexi–7Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis DirectionHandle Feed B, 766Tool Axis Normal Direction Handle Feed, 769Tool Center Point Control, 643Tool Compensation Values, Number of CompensationValues, and Entering Values From the Program(G10), 360Tool Figure and Tool Motion b...

  • Page 1254

  • Page 1255

    Revision RecordFANUCSeries16i/160i/160is–MB, 18i/180i/180is–MB5, 18i/180i/180is–MBOPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–63534EN)02Oct., 2001Addition of Series 160is–MB, 18i–MB5, 180i–MB5, 180is–MB5, and 180is–MBAddition of functions01Jun., 2001EditionDateContentsEditionDateContents

  • Page 1256

  • Page 1257

    • No part of this manual may bereproduced in any form.• All specifications and designsare subject to change withoutnotice.

x